Screen Service Broadcasting Technologies SDTX-ARK6 20 Watt Multimode SDR Transmitter User Manual Software

Screen Service Broadcasting Technologies SpA 20 Watt Multimode SDR Transmitter Software

User Manual

    ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1  Document name: SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC Document code: ARK6-UM-000 Author: C. Di Biase Date: September 23rd, 2011 Version: 1.1            Software User Manual ARK6 External Document
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 2 of 206 Table of Contents 1  Document structure ............................................................................................................... 5 2  Scope of the document .......................................................................................................... 6 3  Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 7 3.1  Digitizer features .............................................................................................................. 9 3.2  Satellite receivers features ............................................................................................... 9 3.2.1  DVB-S/S2 .................................................................................................................. 9 3.2.2  DVB-S/S2 plus CAM ............................................................................................... 10 3.3  Terrestrial receivers features ......................................................................................... 11 3.3.1  ATSC ....................................................................................................................... 11 3.4  ITU Transmitter features ................................................................................................ 12 3.4.1  ITU Features........................................................................................................... 12 3.4.2  ITU Signal Processing ............................................................................................. 13 3.5  ATSC Transmitter features ............................................................................................. 14 3.5.1  ATSC Features ........................................................................................................ 14 3.5.2  ATSC Signal Processing .......................................................................................... 14 3.6  System Features ............................................................................................................. 15 3.7  Synchronization .............................................................................................................. 15 4  Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 16 4.1  Input Interfaces .............................................................................................................. 16 4.2  Output Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 19 4.3  Control Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 22 4.3.1  RS232 pinout ......................................................................................................... 23 4.3.2  TLC pinout .............................................................................................................. 23 4.3.3  TLS pinout .............................................................................................................. 24 4.4  Power Supply .................................................................................................................. 25 4.5  Environmental Specification .......................................................................................... 27 4.6  Mechanical Specification................................................................................................ 27 5  Java Graphic User Interface ................................................................................................. 28 5.1  Authentication Option ................................................................................................... 28 5.2  Java Menu Bar ................................................................................................................ 29 5.3  Home Page ..................................................................................................................... 31 5.4  Input ............................................................................................................................... 32 5.5  Front-End ........................................................................................................................ 37 5.5.1  Tuner window: RF power level monitor ................................................................ 38
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 3 of 206 5.5.2  DIGITIZER FE Type .................................................................................................. 39 5.5.3  ATSC FE Type ......................................................................................................... 41 5.6  ATSC ............................................................................................................................... 44 5.6.1  ATSC Settings ......................................................................................................... 45 5.6.2  ATSC Modulation ................................................................................................... 49 5.6.3  ATSC TVCT .............................................................................................................. 51 5.6.4  ATSC Measure ........................................................................................................ 52 5.7  ITU.470 ........................................................................................................................... 54 5.7.1  ITU Settings ............................................................................................................ 55 5.7.2  ITU Modulation ...................................................................................................... 59 5.8  Manual compensation ................................................................................................... 66 5.8.1  Linear Precorrection .............................................................................................. 66 5.8.2  Non Linear Precorrection ...................................................................................... 68 5.8.3  Port 5000 connection ............................................................................................ 69 5.9  Adaptive compensation ................................................................................................. 70 5.9.1  Linear Adaptive Precorrection ............................................................................... 70 5.9.2  Adaptive Non-Linear Precorrection ....................................................................... 74 5.10  Output ............................................................................................................................ 76 5.10.1  Reflex Power Management ................................................................................... 85 5.11  Network .......................................................................................................................... 87 5.12  GPS ................................................................................................................................. 92 5.12.1  Holdover Management ......................................................................................... 94 5.13  Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 99 5.14  Events ........................................................................................................................... 116 5.14.1  Date and Time Setting ......................................................................................... 126 5.14.2  Task Error Event ................................................................................................... 126 5.14.3  System Error Event .............................................................................................. 127 5.14.4  System Initialization Event .................................................................................. 128 5.15  System menu ................................................................................................................ 131 5.15.1  File Menu ............................................................................................................. 131 5.15.2  View Menu........................................................................................................... 132 5.15.3  Help Menu ........................................................................................................... 135 5.16  Download Software Standalone................................................................................... 137 6  Local User Interface ........................................................................................................... 138 6.1  Boot and Welcome Message ....................................................................................... 139
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 4 of 206 6.2  Idle Menu ..................................................................................................................... 140 6.3  Main Menu ................................................................................................................... 141 6.4  LCD Alarms ................................................................................................................... 142 7  SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol ............................................................... 144 7.1  SNMP Protocol Preferences ......................................................................................... 145 7.2  Monitoring ................................................................................................................... 146 7.3  Events Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 181 7.4  Configuring alarm masks and alarm thresholds ........................................................... 182 7.4.1  Alarms Table ........................................................................................................ 182 7.4.2  Thresholds Table.................................................................................................. 185 7.5  Traps ............................................................................................................................. 188 7.5.1  SNMPv1 ............................................................................................................... 188 7.5.2  SNMPv2 ............................................................................................................... 190 7.5.3  Configuring traps ................................................................................................. 192 Appendix A.  Automatic input source selection methods ........................................................ 193 A.1  Input Autoswitch .......................................................................................................... 193 A.2  Seamless input switching ............................................................................................. 196 Appendix B.  Java Virtual Machine ........................................................................................... 197 B.1  Ethernet connection ..................................................................................................... 197 B.1.1  Configuration ....................................................................................................... 197 B.2  Java(TM) Platform ........................................................................................................ 197 B.2.1  Download ............................................................................................................ 197 B.2.2  Java Control Panel ............................................................................................... 197 B.3  Supported Web Browsers ............................................................................................ 197 Appendix C.  Application Note .................................................................................................. 198 C.1  How to update.............................................................................................................. 198 Appendix D.  Document versions .............................................................................................. 203
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 5 of 206 1 Document structure  This ARK6 User Manual has the following chapters and appendices:  Chapter 1 – Document structure.  Chapter 2 – Scope of the document.  Chapter 3 – Introduction This chapter contains an overview of ARK6 and its features.  Chapter 4 – Specifications This chapter lists the ARK6 specifications.  Chapter 5 – Java remote graphic user interface. This chapter describes the Java interface provided for board managing.  Chapter 6 – Local user interface. This chapter describes the local user interface provided for board managing.  Chapter 7 – SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol   This chapter describes the SNMP interface provided for board managing.  Appendix A – Java Virtual Machine. Appendix with all instruction needed to manage Java Virtual Machine.  Appendix B – Application Note. Appendix with all instructions needed to update ARK6 devices.  Appendix C – Document versions. Appendix with additional information, the present document versions.  Appendix D – List of Tables.  Appendix E – List of Figures.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 6 of 206 2 Scope of the document  Purpose  of  this  document  is  to  provide  a  comprehensive  description  of  the  functionalities  of  the  SDT Series ARK-6 and to provide operating information on the software elements of the ARK6 system. SDT  ARK6  User  Manual  provides  software  setup  information  and  includes  an  overview  of  Java,  SNMP and Local user interfaces.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 7 of 206 3 Introduction  The SDT ARK-6 Series has been designed as a brand new model of software defined transmitters which incorporate all the technical and functional capabilities of the previous models of the ARK-1 family (ARK-1, ARK-R, ARK-T, ARK-ATSC, ECHO-2) together with a complete set of new functionalities that bring the transmitter at the forefront of the technology edge. The New SDT ARK-6 Series is  the result of years of  research and represents the state  of the  art of  the worldwide transmitter technology. We call it UNIVERSAL  DRIVER because of its incredible capability to modulate in all  schemes, just uploading a  proper software package. It is perfect for both international broadcasters which have business in several countries to increase manageability of investment through reduction of transmitter types and national broadcasters, due for its versatility in operation modes and configuration.  In  fact  it  can  be  used  as  a  Transmitter,  an  Heterodyne  Transposer,  a  Regenerative Transposer  and  Single Frequency  Echo  Canceller (proper  to Single Frequency  Networks),  all in a single hardware. ARK-6  UNIVERSAL  DRIVER  is  resilient  to  future  evolutions  of  technology  and  standardization:  this platform  guarantees  a  perfect  upgrade  path  for  new  modulation  schemes  that  the  researchers  will delivery. Besides ARK-6 UNIVERSAL DRIVER already implements DVB-T/T2, PAL, ATSC/MH, NTSC, ISDB-T modulations. The SDT ARK-6 allows selection of transmission modes in various ways: remotely, using a dry contact; via SNMP commands; via TCP/IP, using the Web graphic interface; or even via a dedicated command inserted into the transport stream. Functional interfaces are available for total remote control of  the  apparatus  by  means  of  serial  protocols  or  TCP/IP  ports.  Thanks  to  the  internal  Web  server  the apparatus can be easily monitored and configured and updated using a LAN connection and a standard Web browser. Moreover, the built-in SNMP agent allows full automated remote control. Based on Software Defined Technology, ARK-6 allows the definition of different operative modes on the same  hardware  platform.  A  single  software  controller  allows  the  ARK-6  to  be  loaded  with  up  to  five working  modes  simultaneously  and  to  switch  between  them  preserving  each  mode-specific configuration. The SDT ARK-6 Series specifications can be found in chapter 4. A  brief  description  of  the  main  features  and  potentialities  of  each  operative  mode  follows  in  next paragraphs. The following table shows all the allowed hardware configurations.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 8 of 206 Table 1.  Hardware options Front-End Modulation DVB-T/H DVB-T2 ISDBT ATSC ITU None Transmitter Transmitter Transmitter Transmitter Transmitter DVB-S/S2 Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input X DVB-S/S2 + CAM Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input (with CAM) Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input (with CAM) Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input (with CAM) Transmitter with DVB-S/S2 RF input (with CAM) Transmitter with decoded DVBS2 RX input DVB-T/T2 Regenerative Transposer Heterodyne Transposer Echo Canceller Regenerative Transposer Heterodyne Transposer Echo Canceller X X X ISDBT X X Regenerative Transposer Heterodyne Transposer Echo Canceller X X ATSC X X X Regenerative Transposer Heterodyne Transposer Echo Canceller X DIGITALIZER X X X X Transmitter with A/V analog inputs
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 9 of 206 3.1 Digitizer features  Supports the A/D conversion and decoding of NTSC and PAL CVBS inputs Supports 2 CVBS video and 2 L/R audio inputs Adaptive 2-D, 5-line, adaptive comb filter Automatic video standard detection (NTSC/PAL) Automatic video standard switching Luma-peaking with programmable gain  3.2 Satellite receivers features  3.2.1 DVB-S/S2  Input DVB-S and DVB-S2 demodulator that conforms to ETSI EN 300 421 and ETSI TR 102 376 respectively. Dual multi standard demodulation:  Legacy DVBS and DirecTVTM QPSK  DVBS2 QPSK, 8PSK, 16 and 32APSK  Multi-tap equalizer for RF reflection removal  Wide range carrier frequency tracking loop for offset recovery Dual multi standard decoding:  DVBS or DirecTVTM legacy  DVBS2 FEC and framing  Up to 190 Mbit/s channel bit rate Bit error rate monitoring
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 10 of 206 3.2.2 DVB-S/S2 plus CAM  Input DVB-S and DVB-S2 demodulator that conforms to ETSI EN 300 421 and ETSI TR 102 376 respectively. Dual multi standard demodulation:  Legacy DVBS and DirecTVTM QPSK  DVBS2 QPSK, 8PSK, 16 and 32APSK  Multi-tap equalizer for RF reflection removal  Wide range carrier frequency tracking loop for offset recovery Dual multi standard decoding:  DVBS or DirecTVTM legacy  DVBS2 FEC and framing  Up to 190 Mbit/s channel bit rate Bit error rate monitoring DVB common interface compliant H.264/AVC Level 4.1 high profile video decoder MPEG-2 HD/SD video decoder MP@HL Programmable audio decoder supporting: MPEG1 layer 1, 2 and 3 (MP3), Dolby Digital, AAC LC 4 transport stream decoders and DVB descramblers Teletext / WSS / PDC / CC / VBID insertion Cross Colour / Cross Luminance Filters PAL/NTSC/SECAM digital encoder ITU-R 656 video input & output Analog HD output via YPrPb S/P-DIF output for PCM / MPEG / Dolby Digital 5.1
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 11 of 206 3.3 Terrestrial receivers features  3.3.1 ATSC  Agile VHF/UHF input Down-conversion (from 50.5 MHz up to 862 MHz) Input adjustable offset frequencies: from -200 kHz to +200 kHz (1 Hz step) Input ATSC demodulator that conforms to the ATSC A/53 standard 8VSB demodulator including a highly efficient adaptive equalizer Excellent performance under static and dynamic multi-path environment Fully A-74 and NTIA/CECB compliant Dual AGC for optimal RF versus IF gain control Fully-integrated digital channel filter reduces external IF circuitry to single SAW filter and VGA Incorporates SNR monitor and BER monitor Input RF signal level monitoring
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 12 of 206 3.4 ITU Transmitter features  The ARK-6 ITU is an ITU-R BT.470-6 compliant Transmitter. The key features of the ARK-6 ITU are:  Standard SDI inputs (SMPTE 259M-C – Component 4:2:2);  Agile UHF output Up-converter (from 470 MHz up to 862 MHz). The VHF option is also available.  Output adjustable offset frequencies: from -200 kHz to +200 kHz (1 Hz step).  3.4.1 ITU Features  Inputs 4 SDI, 2 CVBS (optional) and 2 L/R (optional) Supported SDI Standard SMPTE 259M-C – Component 4:2:2 270Mb/s  for  525  and  625  lines,  13.5  MHz  sampling,  4x3 and 16x9 aspect ratios. Outputs 1 RF, 1 RF Monitor 2 SDI for inputs bypass Test modes CW, CW AV, Mute Audio Carrier, Mute Audio, Audio Test Tone, Video In, SMPTE Bars, Horizontal Bars, Red Field, ITS0, ITS1, ITS2, ITS3 and ITS4. Pre-correction Linear Compensation Non-Linear Compensation Redundancy Input autoswitch algorithm supported
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 13 of 206 3.4.2 ITU Signal Processing  Digital audio channels presence and level monitoring. Analog audio sampling rate fixed to 48 kHz. Input redundancy provided by an input autoswitch algorithm based on primary feed presence (SDI and CVBS). Selectable Group Delay curve. Selectable Audio Type. Selectable Sound System. Selectable Emphasis. Adjustable Audio Deviation and Carriers Level. Adjustable White Level, Synchronism Amplitude and Pedes Level. Non-Linear Precorrection. Linear Precorrection.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 14 of 206 3.5 ATSC Transmitter features  The ARK-6 ATSC is an A/53 and A/153 compliant Transmitter. The key features of the ARK-6 ATSC are:  SMPTE-310M  with  19.39  Mbps,  DVB-ASI  (EN-50083/9)  and  Gigabit  Ethernet  (PRO-MPEG COP3 R2) inputs;  Agile  UHF  output  Up-converter  (from  470  MHz  up  to  862  MHz).  The  VHF  option  is  also available.  Output adjustable offset frequencies: from -200 kHz to +200 kHz (1 Hz step).  3.5.1 ATSC Features  Inputs 4 ASI, 2 TSoIP channels and 1 RF(optional) Outputs 1 RF, 1 RF Monitor 2 ASI and 2 TSoIP channels for inputs bypass Test modes CW, Force Null Packets Monitoring Output signal level and quality monitoring Pre-correction Adaptive Linear Compensation Adaptive Non-Linear Compensation Redundancy Input autoswitch algorithm supported  3.5.2 ATSC Signal Processing  Input stream monitoring On-The-Fly substitution of Major and Minor channel numbers in the TVCT for user selectable ones. PCR restamping Null packets deletion Bit rate adaptation through Null packets insertion M/H mode supported M/H Regenerative mode up to 8 M/H number of groups supported User selectable input autoswitch criteria based on primary feed quality (RF, ASI and TSoIP) Linear and Non-Linear Adaptive Precorrections
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 15 of 206 3.6 System Features  Synchronization External or GPS Internal clock Oven Controlled OCXO oscillator (10 MHz  and 1 PPS) Output clock 1 PPS and 10 MHz Management Embedded SNMP v1 server Embedded Web server GbE Ports GbE 1: 10/100/1000 Base T Management port GbE 2: 10/100/1000 Base T Data port Security Authentication for GUI access supported.  3.7 Synchronization  The ARK6 includes a holdover function provided by a higher grade Oven-Controlled Crystal Oscillator. The  ARK6  is  equipped  with  an  internal  OCXO  for  improved  phase  noise  and  stability.  The  system  is provided  with  internal 10MHz  and  1PPS  signals  which are  disciplined to  the GPS time signal  or to the 10MHz  and  1PPS  external  references.  The  stability  of  internal  frequency  and  phase  is  assured  by  the highly stable OCXO. If the satellites signal, from the GPS receiver, or the external reference sources are completely lost, the Holdover mode enables the unit to keep working with internal 10MHz and 1PPS for the duration of the Holdover Timeout, with very low drift over time.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 16 of 206 4 Specifications  4.1 Input Interfaces  ASI/SSI/SDI  Number of inputs 4 Connector BNC Zin 75 Ohm Input voltage 800 mVpp (500 to 1200 mVpp) Supported standards CEI EN 50083-9 SMPTE 310M SMPTE 259M  TSoIP  Number of channels 2 Connector RJ45 Speed 10/100/1000  RF  Number of inputs 1 Connector N female Frequency UHF (VHF optional) Level -76 dB to -16 dB Zin 50 Ohm Supported standards It depends on the FE Type.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 17 of 206  CVBS  Number of inputs 2 Connector BNC Zin 75 Ohm Input Voltage 1 Vpp Supported standards PAL NTSC  Analog Audio  Number of inputs 2 L/R Connector XLR3 (Cannon f) Zin 600 Ohm balanced Input level +6dBm +/- 6 dB Supported standards EIA RF-297-A  GPS  Number of inputs 1 Connector TNC Zin 50 Ohm Sensitivity -185dBW  10 MHz  Number of inputs 1 Connector BNC Zin 50 Ohm Input voltage 2 Vpp
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 18 of 206  1PPS  Number of inputs 1 Connector BNC Zin 50 Ohm Input voltage TTL (min 1,7 V) Pulse width 100 us  Linear Precorrection  Number of inputs 1 Connector SMA Zin 50 Ohm Input level -20 to +11,5 dBm
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 19 of 206 4.2 Output Interfaces  RF  Number of outputs 1 Connector N Female Frequency UHF (VHF optional) Zout 50 Ohm Spectrum polarity Non-inverted (inverted optional) Harmonic and spurious <-50dBm below 1 GHz Digital Level SDTx200: 18 to 38 dBm SDTx500: 21 to 41 dBm SDTx201: SDTx501: 36 to 56 dBm SDTx501-ATSC: 38 to 58 dBm Spectrum outside band +/-3,8 MHz: 0 dB +/-4,25 MHz: < 46 dB +/-5,25 MHz: < 56 dB MER SDTx500/200/201: > 38 dB SDTx501: >36 dB Analog Level SDTx200: 24 to 44 dBm SDTx500: 28 to 48 dBm SDTx201:  SDTx501: 40 to 60 dBm RF Output Reverberate Loss ≥13dB Video Modulation Degree  87.5% Video Flatness ±1.0dB
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 20 of 206  TSoIP  Number of channels 2 Connector RJ45 Speed 10/100/1000 Standard PRO-MPEG COP3 R2  ASI Out Monitor  Number of outputs 2 Connector BNC Zout 75 Ohm Output voltage 800 mVpp (500 to 1200 mVpp) Supported standards CEI EN 50083-9 SMPTE 310M SMPTE 259M  RF Mon  Number of outputs 1 Connector SMA Frequency UHF (VHF optional) Level -40 dBm RF Out Zout 50 Ohm  10 MHz  Number of outputs 1 Connector SMB Zout 50 Ohm Output voltage 2 Vpp
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 21 of 206 1PPS  Number of outputs 1 Connector SMB Zout 50 Ohm Output voltage TTL (min 2,4 V) Pulse width 100 us
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 22 of 206 4.3 Control Interfaces  GbE 1  RS485  Number of interfaces 1 Number of interfaces 1 Connector RJ45 Connector DB9 Speed 10/100/1000 Type CAM BUS  (Not available)     OPTO  Relays  Number of outputs 4 Number of outputs 4 Connector SUB-D 15p Female Connector SUB-D 25p Female Max current -5 mA Max voltage 125VAC  /  60VDC  @ 0,3A – 30VDC @ 1A     RS232    Number of interfaces 1   Connector DB9   Speed Up to 230400 bps   Data 8-bit data   Parity No parity bits   Flow control None   Stop 1 stop bit
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 23 of 206 4.3.1 RS232 pinout  Usually personal computers use a standard RS 232 DE-9 connector. Figure 1. DE-9 Male connector  Table 2.  RS232 DE-9 pinout DE-9 Pin Name Direction Description 2 RXD  Receive Data 3 TXD  Transmit Data 5 GND - System Ground  4.3.2 TLC pinout  ARK6 has a SUB-D 15p Female connector for OPTOs with customized pin assignments. Figure 2. TLC connector  Table 3.  TLC pinout Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 IN_OPTO_0 9 O_GND_0 2 IN_OPTO_1 10 O_GND_1 3 IN_OPTO_2 11 O_GND_2 4 IN_OPTO_3 12 O_GND_3 5 OPTO_GND 13 OPTO_GND 6 VCC_P 14 VCC_P 7 GND 15 GND 8 NC - -
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 24 of 206 4.3.3 TLS pinout  ARK6 has a SUB-D 25p Female connector for Relays with customized pin assignments. Figure 3. TLS connector  Table 4.  TLS pinout Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 RL_NC0 14 RL0_NC0 2 RL_COM0 15 RL0_COM0 3 RL_NO0 16 RL0_NO0 4 RL_NC1 17 RL1_NC1 5 RL_COM1 18 RL1_COM1 6 RL_NO1 19 RL1_NO1 7 RL_NC2 20 RL2_NC2 8 RL_COM2 21 RL2_COM2 9 RL_NO2 22 RL2_NO2 10 RL_NC3 23 RL3_NC3 11 RL_COM3 24 RL3_COM3 12 RL_NO3 25 RL3_NO3 13 NC - -
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 25 of 206 4.4 Power Supply  IEC 1 Voltage 80 – 264 VAC Frequency 50 – 60 Hz  ARK6 1U Mains Consumption [Test on ch. 21] MODE PWR [dBm] Vac [Volt] Iac[Amp] Consumption [W] ST-BY - 225 0,35 78,8 Power OFF - 225 0,40 90,0 Power ON 21 225 0,62 139,5 Power ON 31 225 0,64 144,0 Power ON 37 225 0,71 159,8 Power ON 41 225 0,80 180,0  ARK6 2U Mains Consumption [Test on ch. 21] MODE PWR [dBm] Vac [Volt] Iac[Amp] Consumption [W] ST-BY - 225 0,35 78,8 Power OFF - 225 0,40 90,0 Power ON 40 225 1.9 425 Power ON 47 225 2.9 650 Power ON 50 225 3.7 830 Power ON 52 225 4.4 990 Power ON 53 (1) 225 4.9 1100  Note to the table: (1) If required.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 26 of 206  ARK6 3U Mains Consumption [Test on ch. 45] MODE PWR [dBm] Vac [Volt] Iac[Amp] Consumption [W] ST-BY - 225 0,35 78,8 Power OFF - 225 0,40 90,0 Power ON 43 225 2.8 630 Power ON 50 225 4.5 1010 Power ON 53 225 5.7 1280 Power ON 55 225 6.8 1530 Power ON 56 (1) 225 7.4 1660  Note to the table: (1) If required.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 27 of 206 4.5 Environmental Specification  Climatic Temperature range operating 0 °C to +40 °C (+32 °F to +104 °F) Temperature range within specs +5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F to +113 °F) Temperature range storage -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to +158 °F) Humidity operating max 90% RH EMC Compliant to EN50022 (emission) and EN55024 (immunity) Safety Compliant to EN60950-1 RoHs Compliant with directive 2002/95/EC  4.6 Mechanical Specification  Cabinet 19” wide, 1RU high Width 19” (483 mm) Height 1U: 44 mm (1.75”) 2U: 88 mm (3.5”) 3U: 132mm (5.25”) Cooling Long life fans to assist natural convection Transport and storage Vibration acc. to IEC Publ.68
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 28 of 206 5 Java Graphic User Interface  The Java  Graphic User Interface,  stored in  the  board  File System,  is downloaded to the  local PC every time the user connects to the board with a Web Browser. A proper Java Virtual Machine is needed; refer to the Appendix B for a description of supported Java and Internet Browsers.  5.1 Authentication Option  In order to prevent unauthorized users from accessing ARK6 devices via Java Graphic User Interface, an authentication  mechanism  can  be  enabled  by  means  of  a  factory  setting.  The  name/password credentials provide  control only over who can open the  GUI,  and requires that all  users know a  single name/password to access it. If  the  authentication  mechanism  is  set  for  the  GUI  access,  operators  will  be  prompted  to  enter  User Name  and  Password  before  they  can  have  read/write  access.  The  following  figure  shows  the  window that appears as soon as an operator tries to access the Java GUI. Figure 4. GUI - Login   Enter your User Name and Password and then click “OK” in order to log in.  The default factory login credentials are:   Use the Change Password tab to change your credentials. User name: “screen”        Password: “0000”
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 29 of 206 5.2 Java Menu Bar  The  following  figure  shows  the  menu  bar  of  the  Java  Graphic  User  Interface.  It  allows  the  switching between control pages that will be described in detail in next chapters. Figure 5. Java menu bar   The following controls are provided: System commands bar allows to enable of the following commands:  Connect: releases/acquires the connection to the device.  Save: saves the device configuration.  Load: loads the last saved configuration. Figure 6. System commands bar   Operation pages bar allows to switch between the following windows:  Home  Page:  shows  the  firmware  updating  status,  allows  to  reset  the  device,  to  locally download the *.jar file, to enable the Stand-by mode and to switch between operative modes.  Input: shows ASI, GbE and Tuner input statistics.  Tuner:  allows  to  monitor  input  channel,  frequency  offset,  signal  level  and  quality  and  to monitor the Front-End demodulation parameters.  ITU: allows to monitor and to set the ITU specific parameters.  ISDB-T: allows to monitor and to set the ISDB-T specific parameters.  DVB-T: allows to monitor and to set the DVB-T specific parameters.  ATSC: allows to monitor and to set the ATSC specific parameters.  DVB-T2: allows to monitor and to set the DVB-T2 specific parameters.  Mod. Pha.: allows to manage the linear compensation curves.  AM PM: allows to manage the non-linear compensation curves.  Adaptive Linear Precorrection: allows to manage the adaptive linear compensation.  Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: allows to manage the adaptive non linear compensation.  Outputs: allows to set clock and output parameters and to monitor the hardware status.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 30 of 206  Network: allows to monitor the Network settings of both GbE port 1 and GbE port 2 and to set in/out Ethernet channels parameters.  GPS:  shows  received  GPS  statistics  and  provides  commands  to  manage  the  Holdover functionality.  Alarms: provides a grid where to set LCD,  Graphic User  Interface, Events, Relays,  Traps, Input Switch and RF Off alarm masks.  Events: shows the board events log and allows the manual setting of date and time. Figure 7. Operation pages bar   System menu allows to access the same commands and windows as System commands and Operation pages  bars  do,  plus  management  options,  help  and  version  information  (refer  to  System  menu paragraph). Figure 8. System menu   A brief description of all the provided information and controls follows in the next paragraphs.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 31 of 206 5.3 Home Page  Click on Home Page button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the Home Page. Figure 9. Home Page window   The Home Page  provides  a general description  of  the  equipment,  the  firmware  updating  status  and  a subset of commands here below described:  Modes Management: shows the list of all the available modes, identified by their transmission standard, and allows to switch between them.  Station Identifier: shows and sets the station name.  LCD Standby: enables the LCD Stand-by button.  Reset: resets the equipment.  Download Software Standalone: performs a local download of the *.jar file (refer to Download Software Standaloneparagraph).  Firmware Updating Status: the three indicators turn into: o Yellow during FPGA, uC and GPS updating; o Green when the updating process is finished (FPGA and uC); o Grey when new code has been loaded (after next system reset). The progress bars, at the right side of the FPGA and GPS indicators, show the status of firmware loading process into FLASH. The FPGA and GPS indicators remain yellow until the new firmware is loaded. When either FPGA or uC indicators turn into green, the transmitter shall be reset in order to load the new software.  In the Home Page is also specified the installer version the device has been loaded with.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 32 of 206 5.4 Input  Click on Input button, highlighted in the next figure, to monitor the input statistics window. Figure 10. ATSC / DVB-T/T2 Input window    The Input window allows to monitor Transport Stream  and SDI input statistics and to enable the cable equalizer bypass of each one of them.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 33 of 206 Table 5.  Input window Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values ASI Word rate Input word rate. Approximately 27 Mword/s Tuner Word rate Input byte rate.  ASI - Tuner Bitrate Input bitrate.  ASI - Tuner Filtered bitrate Bitrate actually used by the modulator.  Zero when the input has not been selected  Equal to the total bitrate, when Delete Null Packets disabled  Less than total bitrate, when Delete Null Packets enabled ASI - Tuner Format Format of received TS Packets.  188 Bytes  204 Bytes ASI CD ASI Carrier detect.  Green: Detected  Grey: Not detected ASI - Tuner Lock The actual synchronization of the Transport Stream. It depends on the number of correct sync bytes necessary for the device to synchronize and on the number of destroyed sync bytes witch the device cannot cope with. Five consecutive correct sync bytes are sufficient for sync acquisition, and two or more consecutive corrupted sync bytes indicate sync loss (Ref. to ETSI TR 101 290)  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 34 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values ASI - Tuner Overflow TS input overflow indicator. This alarm condition occurs when the input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation (Ref. to ETSI EN 302 755).  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off ASI Word Errors Input error rate: word errors per second.  Tuner Word Errors Input error rate: Byte errors per second.  Equalizer Bypass ASI 1/2/3/4 Equalizer Bypass Equalizer Bypass 1/2/3/4 Enables/disables the bypassing of cable equalizers at ASI/SDI inputs.  Checked: Cable equalizer is bypassed  Not checked: Cable equalizer is used GbE 2–  Channel 1/2 Protocol Ethernet input packets protocol.  UDP  RTP GbE 2–  Channel 1/2 Bitrate Bitrate of TS from Ethernet input.  GbE 2–  Channel 1/2 Filtered bitrate Bitrate actually used by the modulator.  Zero when the input is not selected  Equal to the total bit-rate, when Delete Null Packets disabled  Less than total bit-rate, when Delete Null Packets enabled GbE 2–  Channel 1/2 Format Format of received TS Packets.  188 Bytes  204 Bytes GbE 2–  Channel 1/2 Lock TS lock status. The input Transport Stream is unlocked when more than two consecutive Sync Byte are missed then five consecutive Sync Bytes must occur to regain the lock (Ref. to ETSI TR 101 290)  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 35 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values GbE 2–  Channel1/2 Overflow Input GbE overflow alarm status. This alarm condition occurs when the input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation (Ref. to ETSI EN 302 755).  Red: Alarm on  Grey: Alarm off GbE 2– Statistics GBE Good Pck Total amount of frames delivered to the higher-level protocol.  GbE 2– Statistics GbE Speed Ethernet connection speed. No duplex information is provided.  10 Mbit//s  100 Mbit//s  1 Gbit//s GbE 2– Statistics GBE Bad Pck The number of inbound packets that contained errors.  SDI 1/2/3/4 Lock Shows the presence of a valid SDI input stream.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked SDI 1/2/3/4 CD Shows that the SDI input signal carrier has been correctly locked.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked SDI 1/2/3/4 Ch1-2 Shows that the SDI input audio data have been correctly locked.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked SDI 1/2/3/4 Ch3-4 Shows that the SDI input audio data have been correctly locked.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked SDI 1/2/3/4 Ch 1/2/3/4 Level [dBFS] Shows the embedded digital audio level. Measured in dB difference from the max digital level.  0 down to -114dB
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 36 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values SDI 1/2/3/4 Standard Shows the video standard detected for the SDI input.  NTSC 4:2:2 component video;  NTSC 4:2:2 16x9 component video;  NTSC 4:4:4 13,5 MHz component video;  PAL 4:2:2 component video;  PAL 4:2:2 16x9 component video;  PAL 4:4:4 13,5 MHz component video" Layers Rates Layer A/B/C Rate [bit/s] Bitrate actually used by the modulator. Used in remux mode only  Layers Rates Layer A/B/C Overflow Layer input overflow alarm status. This alarm condition occurs when the input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation  Used in remux mode only.  Red: Alarm on  Grey: Alarm off Layers Rates Layer A/B/C Underflow Layer input underflow alarm status. Used in remux mode only.  Red: Alarm on  Grey: Alarm off
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 37 of 206 5.5 Front-End  Click on Front-End button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the tuner window. Figure 11. Front-End window   Use  the  Tuner  window  to  monitor  input  channel,  frequency  offset,  signal  level  and  quality,  and  to monitor the RF input demodulation parameters. The Tuner window is composed by the following sections:  RF power level monitor;  Demodulation parameters;  Constellation (DVB-T/T2). Tuner window changes on the basis of the Front-End type. The available FE types are:  DVB-T/T2  ISDB-T  Digitizer  ATSC  DVB-S2  DVB-S2 CAM  A brief description of the features of each Tuner panel follows in next paragraphs.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 38 of 206 5.5.1 Tuner window: RF power level monitor Figure 12. Tuner window: RF power level monitor  Table 6.  Tuner window: RF power level monitor Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General Rx Level [dBm] /  Progress Bar Input RF power level monitor expressed in dBm.  Min: -84  Max: -21  Low Power  High Power General Low Power Rx Signal This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beneath the Low AGC Threshold and, consequently, both DAT 1 and DAT 2 are at their minimum values.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off General High Power Rx Signal This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beyond the High AGC Threshold and, consequently, both DAT 1 and DAT 2 are at their maximum values.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off General Channel This indicator shows the input RF channel. VHF:  Min: E2  Max: E12 UHF:  Min: 21  Max: 69 General Offset [Hz] This indicator shows the input frequency offset.  Min: - 200 kHz  Max: + 200 kHz General Bandwidth [MHz] Input channel bandwidth. It depends on the FE Type.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 39 of 206 5.5.2 DIGITIZER FE Type  This page shows the available statistics for the analog input video. Figure 13. CVBS Inputs: Statistics
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 40 of 206 Table 7.  CVBS Inputs: Statistics Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General A/D PAL Compensation Enable the PAL compensation on digitized video. This features should be enabled only for particular application e.g. the external ITS insertion in a PAL-M system.  Enabled  Disabled CVBS 1/2 input Lock General input video signal lock, this is on when the following three signals are locked.   Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked CVBS 1/2 input Vertical lock Shows the locking of the vertical synchronization signal.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked CVBS 1/2 input Color sub Show the locking of the color subcarrier signal.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked CVBS 1/2 input Horizontal lock Show the locking of the horizontal synchronization signal.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not locked CVBS 1/2 input Standard Shows the detected input video standard. The video standard detected must be compatible with the modulation defined for the device, otherwise a “wrong input standard” alarm is raised.  NTSC (M, J),  PAL (B, D, G, H, I, N),  PAL (M),  PAL (Combination-N),  NTSC,  SECAM,  PAL (60) CVBS 1/2 input Field rate Show the rate of video field refresh   50Hz  60Hz
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 41 of 206 5.5.3 ATSC FE Type  The  Tuner  panel  for  the  ATSC  Front-End  shows  the  status  of  the  demodulator,  the  input  modulation parameters and the received signal quality. Figure 14. ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 42 of 206 Table 8.  ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General VSB Demod Status VSB demodulation status.  Reset  Reset Wait  AGC Wait 1  AGC Wait 2  Carrier Synchro  NCO Loop  VCXO Wait  Segment Synchro  Tap Computation  Eq Training Mode  Start Eq  Error General Equalyzer Status Equalizer status.  EQ Reset  EQ FFE Train  EQ Blind 1  EQ Blind 2  EQ DDM 1  EQ DDM 2  Error
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 43 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General Demodulator Lock Demodulator lock status  Green: Locked  Grey: Unlocked General Digital AGC Lock Digital AGC lock status.  Green: Locked  Grey: Unlocked General Frame Lock Indicator Frame lock status.  Green: Locked  Grey: Unlocked General Carrier Frequency Loop Lock Carrier frequency loop lock status.  Green: Locked  Grey: Unlocked General Timing Frequency Loop Lock Timing frequency loop lock status.  Green: Locked  Grey: Unlocked General Frequency Offset [kHz] Output carrier offset.  General SNR [dB] Signal to Noise Ratio [dB]  General SER Segment Error Rate.  General BER Bit Error Rate.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 44 of 206 5.6 ATSC  Click on ATSC button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ATSC window. Figure 15. ATSC window   Use the ATSC Processing page to manage ATSC specific configuration parameters and to monitor output signal level and quality.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 45 of 206 5.6.1 ATSC Settings  Click on the ATSC Settings button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ATSC general settings. Figure 16. ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings   Use  the  ATSC  Settings  page  to  select  inputs,  to  set  input/output  RF  channels,  offset  frequencies, Frontend  and  Measure  alarm  thresholds  and  to  manage  Input  Autoswitch  functionality  (refer  to Appendix A for further information). Settings within this page will be used only in ATSC mode but will be saved and stored as mode specific controls.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 46 of 206 Table 9.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Input Input Selector Input selector. It is not allowed to change input until the Input Autoswitch is enabled. In order to change the primary input, disable the Input Autoswitch functionality, select a different input through the input selector and then enable the Input Autoswitch functionality.  ASI 1  ASI 2  ASI 3  ASI 4  Tuner  GbE 2 ch1  GbE 2 ch2 Input Input Alarm Delay [s] Time to wait for No Input alarm rising expressed in seconds (refer to Alarms paragraph). Note: It is highly recommended to set an Input Alarm Delay value different from zero so as to allow the input signal locking.  Min: 1 s  Max: 25.5 s Input Autoswitch Auto Input Enable Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine. Refer to Appendix A. for further information.  Enabled  Disabled Input Autoswitch Actual Input Shows the currently used input.  ASI 1  ASI 2  ASI 3  ASI 4  Tuner  GbE 2 ch1  GbE 2 ch2
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 47 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Input Autoswitch Primary to Secondary Switch Counter Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds.  Min: 0 s  Max: *.def file dependant  Default: 25 s Input Autoswitch Secondary to Secondary Switch Counter Secondary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds.  Min: 0 s  Max: *.def file dependant  Default: 25 s Input Autoswitch Secondary to Primary Switch Counter Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed in seconds.  Min: 0 s  Max: *.def file dependant  Default: 300 s Input Autoswitch State Current state of the finite-state machine  Priority Input Locked  Priority Input Not Locked  Searching First Input Locked  Check Priority Input Tuner Channel Input RF channel selector.  Min: 14  Max: 77 Tuner Offset [Hz] The receiver frequency will accept offset frequencies in the range +/- 200 kHz (1 Hz steps).  Min: - 200 kHz  Max: + 200 kHz FE Alarm Thresholds SNR Thr [dB] FE Signal to Noise alarm threshold.  Min: 10 dB  Max: 50 dB
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 48 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values MEAS Alarm Thresholds SNR Thr [dB] Meas Signal to Noise alarm threshold.  Min: 10  Max: 50 Output Channel Output channel. Channel ranges are device’s definition dependant. Output Offset [Hz] Output frequency offset (expressed in Hz).  Min: -200 kHz  Max: +200 kHz Output Power [dBm] Output power (expressed in dBm). Output power ranges are device’s definition dependant. Output Power [W] Output power (expressed in W).
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 49 of 206 5.6.2 ATSC Modulation  The ATSC Modulation window allows to select test signals and to manage the M/H mode. Figure 17. ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 50 of 206 Table 10.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values MODULATION Delete Null Packets Delete null packets enabling check box.  Checked: Enabled  Not checked: Disabled TEST  The selector of test signal.  None  CW  Force Null Packets M/H PID Sets the PID of M/H packets.  Min: 0  Max: 8191 M/H Frame Status M/H frame alarm.  Grey: M/H mode disabled  Green: Alarm OFF.  Red: Alarm ON M/H M/H Mode Enable Enables/disables the M/H mode.  Checked: Enabled  Not checked: Disabled M/H REGEN Enable Enables/disables the M/H Regeneration mode. The maximum M/H total number of groups supported by the M/H Regeneration mode is 8.  Checked: Enabled  Not checked: Disabled
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 51 of 206 5.6.3 ATSC TVCT  The ATSC TVCT window allows to modify On-The-Fly Major and Minor channel numbers associated with the virtual channels defined in the incoming TVCT. If  the  definition  of  the  current  TVCT  changes,  the  version  number  of  the  table  shall  be  accordingly modified otherwise the functioning of the facility is not assured. Note: On-The-Fly processing of multi-section TVCTs is not supported. Figure 18. ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation   Click on Add button to add an entry to the channel numbers table. The insertion of a Channel In being not defined in the incoming TVCT won’t result in any change in the output TVCT. Figure 19. ATSC TVCT: Add button   The available controls in the ATSC TVCT windows follow:  Add: Adds an entry to the table.  Remove: Removes an entry from the table.  Apply: Applies the new configuration.  Clear All: Empties the entries of the channel numbers table.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 52 of 206 5.6.4 ATSC Measure  Click on Measure button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the measure window. Figure 20. ATSC Processing: ATSC Measure   Use the Measure window to monitor output signal level and quality. Refer to ATSC FE Type paragraph for a detailed description of each field within this window.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 53 of 206 5.6.4.1 ATSC Measure window: RF power level monitor Figure 21. ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor  Table 11.  ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General Monitor Tx Level [dBm] /  Progress Bar This value is the level of the signal, passing through the transmission section and re-entering the system after the channel filter, that will be used for the adaptive compensation. The tolerance of the read value is ±1 dB.  Min: - 20  Max: 11,5  Low Power  High Power General Low Power Tx Signal This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beneath the Low AGC Threshold and, consequently, input attenuation is at its minimum level.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off General High Power Tx Signal This alarm is raised when Max ADC Value is beyond the High AGC Threshold and, consequently, input attenuation is at its maximum level.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 54 of 206 5.7 ITU.470  Click on ITU button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ITU modulator parameters window. Figure 22. ITU window  Use the ITU Processing page to manage the configuration of the analog modulator.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 55 of 206 5.7.1 ITU Settings  Click on the ITU Settings button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the ITU general settings. Figure 23. ITU Processing: ITU Settings   Use the ITU Settings page to select inputs, to set input/output RF channels, offset frequencies, Frontend and  Measure alarm thresholds and to  manage Input Autoswitch  functionality  (refer  to  Appendix  A for further information). Settings within this page  will  be  used only  in ITU  mode but  will be  saved and  stored as mode  specific controls.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 56 of 206 Table 12.  ITU Processing: ITU Settings Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Input Video input Video input selector. Use this control to select one of the available video inputs. CVBS analog inputs are available only when the A/V frontend is available. When and SDI input is selected, the embedded audio channel for that input are modulated and the user can select between channel 1-2 and channel 3-4. When CVBS input is selected the relative analog audio input channels are used.  SDI 1  SDI 2  SDI 3  SDI 4  CVBS 1  CVBS 2 Input Embedded audio input Embedded audio channels selector.  When a SDI input is selected this control can be used to send the embedded audio channels 1-2 or the embedded audio channels 3-4 to the modulation.  Channel 1-2  Channel 3-4 Output Channel Output RF channel selector. Output channel selection depends on the channel planning definition loaded on the device. The following ranges and values are typical for Italian/European TV channels. VHF (BIII EU option):  Min: E2  Max: E12 UHF (UHF EU option):  Min: 21  Max: 69 Output Offset [Hz] The receiver frequency will accept offset frequencies in the range +/- 200 kHz (1 Hz steps).  Min: - 200 kHz  Max: + 200 kHz Output Power [dBm] Output power setting. This control sets the output power in dBm values. Changing this control will also change the value of power control expressed in W.  Min and Max values depends on the power class of the device. e.g. for a SDTX-500 device:  28 dBm up to 48 dBm
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 57 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Output Power [w] Output power setting. This control sets the output power in W. Changing this control will also change the value of power control expressed in dBm.  Min and Max values depends on the power class of the device. e.g. for a SDTX-500 device:  0.63 W up to 63 W Input Autoswitch Auto Input Enable Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine. Refer to Appendix A. for further information.  Enabled  Disabled Input Autoswitch Actual Input Shows the currently used input.  SDI 1  SDI 2  SDI 3  SDI 4  CVBS 1  CVBS 2 Input Autoswitch Primary to Secondary Switch Counter Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds.  Min: 0 s  Max: *.def file dependant  Default: 25 s Input Autoswitch Secondary to Secondary Switch Counter Secondary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds.  Min: 0 s  Max: *.def file dependant  Default: 25 s Input Autoswitch Secondary to Primary Switch Counter Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed in seconds.  Min: 0 s  Max: *.def file dependant  Default: 300 s
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 58 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Input Autoswitch State Current state of the finite-state machine  Priority Input Locked  Priority Input Not Locked  Searching First Input Locked  Check Priority Input
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 59 of 206 5.7.2 ITU Modulation The ITU Modulation window allows actual modulation parameters monitoring and setting. Figure 24. ITU Processing page: ITU Modulation   The ITU Modulation window is composed by the following sections:  Modulator manager;  Test: used to manage RF test modes and Audio-Video test
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 60 of 206 5.7.2.1 ITU Modulation: Modulator manager  Commands and indicators belonging to this section allow to:  Select the video modulation parameters;  Set the audio modulation parameters;  Set the group delay. Figure 25. ITU Modulation: Modulator manager
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 61 of 206 Table 13.  ITU Modulation: Modulator manager Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Video  White Level [%] Video white level setting. The level value is in percentage upon the synch level. The synch level is taken as 100% reference.   MIN: 10  MAX: 22  Step: 0,05 Video  Synch. Amplitude [%] Video synch amplitude setting. The level value is in percentage upon the synch level. The synch level is taken as 100% reference.  MIN: 22  MAX: 27,5  Step: 0,05 Video  Pedes Level [%] Video pedes level setting. The level value is in percentage upon the synch level. The synch level is taken as 100% reference.  MIN: 0  MAX: 7  Step: 0,05 Audio Deviation Audio deviation.  This parameter is used to change the frequency deviation of the audio modulation in order to adjust the audio volume.   Relative values  0 up to 255  Default value 100 Audio Carrier Level 1 [dB] Audio 1 carrier level setting.  This parameter is the amplitude difference, expressed in dB values, between the video carrier and the audio 1 carrier.   MIN: -22  MAX: -7  Step: 1
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 62 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Audio Carrier Level 2 [dB] Audio 2 carrier level setting.   This parameter is the amplitude difference, expressed in dB values, between the video carrier and the audio 1 carrier. Not used for mono audio carrier configurations such as NTSC or PAL M.  MIN: -22  MAX: -7  Step: 1 Audio Emphasis Audio emphasis value monitor.   The audio emphasis used depends on the modulation standard.  50us (used for PAL-BG)  75us Audio Emphasis disable Audio emphasis disable. This control disables the audio emphasis.  Audio emphasis enabled (not ticked);  Audio emphasis disabled (ticked). Audio  Audio type Audio modulation type selection.  This control selects the audio modulation mode. Stereo and dual carrier modes are not available for standards that support mono audio only.   Mono dual carrier;  Dual sound;  Stereo;  Mono single carrier. Audio Sound system Audio carrier spacing selector.  This control shows more options for the standard that supports more than one audio carrier spacing.  FM 5.5/5.742   Group delay Group delay selector Select the group delay to apply.  The available group delay curve depends on the group delay definition loaded on the device.  e.g. for PAL BG:  Flat (no group delay curve)  Curve A  Curve B
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 63 of 206 5.7.2.2 ITU Modulation: Modulator test controls The following controls enable the testing of RF signal, audio and video. Figure 26. ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 64 of 206 Table 14.  ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Test Test mode Enables one of the available test modes for RF signal.  None;  CW: non modulated carrier at centre frequency;  CW AV: non modulated video and audio carriers; Test Video test Enables one of the available video test signals.  Input video. No test signal;  SMPTE bars;  Horizontal bars;  Red field. Test Audio test Enables one of the available audio test signals.   No audio test;  Test tone. Sin waves at the selected frequency on left and right channel. (Left only for mono modulations) Test Tone right [100 Hz]  Set the frequency of the right channel test tone. Base unit is 100Hz.  Base unit 100 Hz;  0 up to 127, 0 up to 12.7 kHz. Test Tone left [100 Hz]  Set the frequency of the right channel test tone. Base unit is 100Hz.  Base unit 100 Hz;  0 up to 127, 0 up to 12.7 kHz. Test  Mute audio enable Enables the audio carriers’ suppression for test purposes.  Mute audio disabled: audio carries are transmitted;  Mute audio enabled: audio carriers are suppressed.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 65 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Test ITS 0 Select the line where to inject the ITS 0 when the enable ITS insert option is enabled.  Min: 7  Max: 622 Test ITS 1 Select the line where to inject the ITS 1 when the enable ITS insert option is enabled.  Min: 7  Max: 622 Test ITS 2 Select the line where to inject the ITS 2 when the enable ITS insert option is enabled.  Min: 7  Max: 622 Test ITS 3 Select the line where to inject the ITS 3 when the enable ITS insert option is enabled.  Min: 7  Max: 622 Test ITS 4 Select the line where to inject the ITS 4 when the enable ITS insert option is enabled.  Min: 7  Max: 622 Test  Enable ITS insert Enables the insertion of Injected Test Signals in the selected video lines.  Min: 7  Max: 622
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 66 of 206 5.8 Manual compensation  5.8.1 Linear Precorrection  Click on Linear Precorrection button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the filter window. Figure 27. Adaptive Linear Precorrection   The ARK6 system provides a pre-correction tool for Module&Phase output signal pre-correction. This tool provides two grids for the drawing of:  Module of the filter’s curve.  Group Delay of the filter’s curve. The two curves are used to calculate the linear pre-correction coefficients. The curves are drawn by the interpolation  of  1024  points  referring  to  the  points  inserted  and  using  a  linear  or  polynomial interpolation algorithm. Knob points can be added with a left-click of the mouse on the grid and deleted with a right-click, drag and move a point to change the curve. Each coefficient variation, due to curves change, is saved in the FPGA “runtime” memory registers and dynamically changes the device’s output.  The  tool  is  prevented  to  send  an  “overflowing”  amount  of  data  to  the  device:  curve  changes  will  be applied only when the mouse button is released.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 67 of 206  In the module grid,  the red curve is used to monitor the current module curve calculating  and saving. The last saved coefficients are locally downloaded from the FPGA runtime memory registers in order to redraw the curve. Remember to click on the Save as button the first time you change the factory default curves in order to do not overwrite them. The following buttons allow the management of linear  pre-correction files and the management of the connection to port 5000:   Save: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file will  be  overwritten  except  in  the  event  that  no  files  have  been  saved  before;  in  this  case  a dedicated window appears in order to let the user name the new file.  Save as: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file will be overwritten with a new name. In the event that no files have been saved before, a new file will be created.  Read file: used to reload the last saved file.  Export:  used  to  download  pre-correction  files  on  the  user  PC.  A  browser  window  allows  the selection of the saving path.  Release: releases the connection in order to allow others remote machines to connect to port 5000 (refer to Connection to port 5000 paragraph).
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 68 of 206 5.8.2 Non Linear Precorrection  Click on AM/PM button icon, highlighted in the next figure, to access the pre-correction window. Figure 28. AM/PM Precorrection  Two main actions are possible in this section:  AM/AM and AM/PM curve drawing: used to change the AM/PM pre-correction coefficient.  AM/PM pre-correction files management: used to open or save AM/PM pre-correction setting file.  AM/AM and AM/PM curves are specific for each power range of each output channel. The two  curves are  used to  calculate the AM/PM  pre-correction  coefficients. The curves are drawn by the  interpolation  of  1024  points  referring  to  the  points  inserted  and  using  a  linear  or  polynomial interpolation algorithm. Knob points can be added with a left-click of the mouse on the grid and deleted with a right-click, drag and move a point to change the curve. Each coefficient variation, due to curves change, is saved in the FPGA “runtime” memory registers and dynamically changes the device’s output.  The  tool  is  prevented  to  send  an  “overflowing”  amount  of  data  to  the  device:  curve  changes  will  be applied only when the mouse button is released.  In the module grid,  the red curve is used to monitor the current module curve  calculating and saving. The last saved coefficients are locally downloaded from the FPGA runtime memory registers in order to redraw the curve.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 69 of 206 During saving actions one linear pre-correction file is created, the *.dpre file, which contains the digital coefficients for linear pre-correction filter.  The following buttons allow the management of non linear pre-correction files and the management of the connection to port 5000:   Save: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file will  be  overwritten  except  in  the  event  that  no  files  have  been  saved  before;  in  this  case  a dedicated window appears in order to let the user name the new file.  Save as: used to save in the device memory the current curves setting. The previously saved file will be overwritten with a new name. In the event that no files have been saved before, a new file will be created.  Read file: used to reload the last saved file.  Export:  used  to  download  pre-correction  files  on  the  user  PC.  A  browser  window  allows  the selection of the saving path.  Release: releases the connection in order to allow others remote machines to connect to port 5000 (refer to Connection to port 5000 paragraph).  5.8.3 Port 5000 connection  The connection to port 5000 is performed every time a pre-correction tool is opened through Mod. Pha. and AM/PM buttons, from Java interface. The pre-correction tool opens and keeps busy the connection to port 5000 till the connection releasing. The connection to this port precludes the possibility of:  programming the device;  allowing more than one user, the very same one that is keeping busy the connection, to open the pre-correction tools,  saving the parameters of the Option sub-menu. The Release button comes through  these limits. It  closes the connection to  port  5000, close the Mod. Pha.  /  AM/PM  window  and  opens  the  General  window.  Once  clicked  the  Release  buttons  and  before quitting the pre-correction tool, three options are provided:  Continue: continue without saving;  Save and Release: save, continue and release the connection;  Cancel: cancel the request of releasing the connection.  Figure 29. Realizing connection
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 70 of 206 5.9 Adaptive compensation  5.9.1 Linear Adaptive Precorrection  Click on Linear Adaptive Precorrection button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the filter window. Figure 30. Adaptive Linear Precorrection   This window provides commands and indicators for adaptive filter management and monitor.  The Filter window is organized as follows:  Management panel.  Complex filter coefficients graph.  Module graph.  Phase graph. In order to enable the adaptive linear precorrection, click on the ON/OFF button.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 71 of 206 5.9.1.1 Adaptive Filter  The Adaptive Filter provides the ARK6 with an effective adaptive linear compensation. The developed system is responsible for pre-emptively compensating a DVB-T/T2 signal in order to make unimportant  the  contribution  of  the  system  transmission  section.  The  signal  passes  through  the transmission  section  and  re-enters  the  system  as  to  determine  the  distortion  and  the  compensating adaptive filter. The system is composed of two main blocks: a Power Calculation block and a 128-tap Complex FIR. The modulated signal, with IQ format and sampled at c frequency, enters both blocks: Power Calculation block is responsible for estimating the mean power level that will be restored at both transmitting and receiving sides; 128-tap  Complex  FIR  is  responsible  for  linearly  pre-correcting  the  modulated  signal.  Filter  coefficients are  obtained  by  estimating  the  channel  between  the  signal  before  the  transmission  section  and  the signal reentering the system, after the channel distortion and the A/D conversion. Figure 31. Adaptive Filter
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 72 of 206 5.9.1.2 Adaptive Linear Precorrection: Management panel Table 15.  Adaptive Linear Precorrection: Management panel Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General Load Loads filter coefficients from the respective FPGA registers.  General Clear Loads flat curve coefficients.  General Timeout [s] Once enabled, the adaptive linear compensation has a timeout. When the timeout is expired, the precorrection is stopped. In order to continue updating coefficients, click on ON/OFF button. Fixed to 60 seconds General Save Saves the current adaptive filter coefficients.  General ON/OFF Enables the adaptive linear compensation.  ON(Green):Enabled  OFF(Red): Disabled General Status Shows the type of adaptive compensation currently used, if any.  None  Linear  Non Linear General Low Power Rx Signal Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a low power. When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is stopped.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off General High Power Rx Signal Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a high power. When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is stopped.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 73 of 206 5.9.1.3 Complex Filter coefficients graph  The Complex Filter coefficients graph shows the current coefficients values. The circles indicate the real part of coefficients; the red crosses indicate the imaginary one. Figure 32. Filter window: complex filter coefficients graph   5.9.1.4 Module graph  The  Module  graph  shows  the  actual  output  signal  module  according  to  the  complex  filer  coefficients applied. Figure 33. Filter window: module graph   5.9.1.5 Phase graph  The  Phase  graph  shows  the  actual  output  signal  phase  according  to  the  complex  filer  coefficients applied. Figure 34. Filter window: phase graph
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 74 of 206 5.9.2 Adaptive Non-Linear Precorrection  The  Non  Linear  Adaptive  Filter  provides  the  ARK6-T2  with  an  effective  adaptive  non  linear compensation. The  developed  system  is  responsible  for  pre-emptively  compensating  the  signal  in  order  to  make unimportant the contribution of the intermodulation products due to the power amplifiers. The signal passes through the power amplifiers and re-enters the system as to determine the distortion and the compensating adaptive filter. In order to enable the adaptive non linear precorrection, click on the ON/OFF button. Figure 35. Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 75 of 206 5.9.2.1 Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: Management panel Table 16.  Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: Management panel Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General Clear Resets the filter coefficients to zero.  General ON/OFF Enables the adaptive non linear compensation.  ON(Green):Enabled  OFF(Red): Disabled General Status Shows the type of adaptive compensation currently used, if any.  None  Linear  Non Linear General Low Power Rx Signal Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a low power. When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is stopped.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off General High Power Rx Signal Indicates that the signal that re-enters the system has a high power. When this flag is on, the automatic update of the filter coefficients is stopped.  Red: Alarm On  Grey: Alarm Off
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 76 of 206 5.10 Output  Click on Output button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the output window. Figure 36. Output window   Use the Output  window to change  Ethernet,  RF and  ASI  outputs  settings,  and to monitor  all available hardware indicators.  ASI Out selectors are used as direct bypass of the specified inputs to ASI OUT HP and ASI OUT LP output interfaces.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 77 of 206 Table 17.  Output window Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General RF ON / OFF Output RF signal enabling. The possible output RF signal status are the following:  ON;  RF OFF: automatic switch off of the output signal (refer to Amplifier status);  OFF: manual switch off of the output signal.  Green: ON  Green: RF OFF  Red: OFF Clock Frequency reference Frequency reference source selector. This command will select the reference  source used  to  lock  the  internal  clocks  (10  MHz and  1 PPS). When set to internal the 10 MHz clock and 1 PPS generator runs unlocked. When set to external or GPS the 10 MHz clock is locked  to  the  source  selected  and  the  1  PPS  counter  reset  is triggered by the source 1 PPS. Note:  External  10  MHz,  1PPS  and  GPS  shall  be  connected  and locked  when  the  External  and  GPS  are  selected  as  frequency references.  If  the  Network  Mode  is  SFN  and  the  Frequency Reference  is  set  to  Internal,  the  frequency  reference  is automatically forced to GPS and the event “Freq Ref Forced: GPS” is  generated  Use  the  Actual  Freq.  Ref.indicator  in  order  to  check the used reference source.  External  Internal  GPS Clock Actual Freq. Ref. Frequency reference source actually used.  External  Internal  GPS Centre Frequency[Hz]  Shows the output centre frequency expressed in Hz.  AGC AGC ON AGC status.  Green: ON  Grey: OFF
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 78 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Status PS 26V [V] First  PSU  voltage  indicator,  expressed  in  Volt,  for  SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501 devices.  Min: 24V  Max: 28V Status PS Current  26V [A] First  PSU  current  indicator,  expressed  in  Ampere,  for  SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501 devices.  Max: 8A Status PS1 50V [V] Second PSU voltage indicator, expressed in Volt, for SDTx201 and SDT501 devices.  Min: 45V  Max: 55V Status PS1 Current 50V [A] Second PSU current indicator, expressed in Ampere, for SDTx201 and SDT501 devices.  Max: 18A Status PS2 50V [V] Third  PSU  voltage  indicator,  expressed  in  Volt,  for  SDTx501 devices.  Min: 45V  Max: 55V Status PS2 Current 50V [A] Third  PSU  current  indicator,  expressed  in  Ampere,  for  SDTx501 devices.  Max: 18A Status Ampli status Current amplifier status indicator: 1. ON: the amplifier has been manually set to on and no alarms or settings switched it off 2. PS Alarm OFF: when an alarm of over current, over voltage or over power occurs on the second or third Power Supply, the Amplifier is restarted four times, if the alarm is still on, the Amplifier is automatically switched off. Single Power Supply models do not support this status 3. Restart: the amplifier has been automatically restarted due to an alarm for over current, over voltage or forward power exceeding the upper limit on the second Power Supply. Single Power Supply models do not support this status 4. Stand-by OFF: the equipment has been put on Standby mode and the amplifier has been automatically muted 5. Init: at every amplifier initialization the amp is automatically switched off.  ON  PS Alarm OFF  Restarting  Stand-by OFF  Init  Alarm OFF  RF OFF  Opto OFF  Change mode  Missing file OFF
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 79 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values 6. Alarm OFF: an alarm switched off the amplifier 7. RF OFF: amplifier manually set to off  8. Opto OFF: output RF is switched off by an optocoupler 9. Change mode: the amplifier is automatically switched off during the mode switch (e.g. T1 / T2) 10. Missing file OFF: the amplifier is automatically switched off because of the lack of *.cdef and *.def files (additional files will be included in future releases).  11. Loading New Config: the amplifier is automatically switched off during the loading of new T2 configuration parameters, 12. Reflex Pwr High retry: the output RF stage has been restart because of the reflex power that has gone over the maximum threshold. 13. Reflex Pwr Alarm: the maximum number of attempts to restore the system after a Reflex Power High warning has been reached, the equipment is in Reflex Power High alarm and the Amplifier has been automatically switched off. 14. Test Mode: the amplifier is in ON state, but the transmitter is modulating a test signal instead of the selected input. 15. Start New Firmware: during the loading of a new fw the output RF is OFF. 16. Restart Mode: a system error occurs and the FPGA fw boot is forced. During these operations the amplifier is turned OFF.  Loading New Config  Reflex Pwr High Retry  Reflex Pwr High Alarm  Test Mode  Start New Fw  Restart Mode Status RF Temperature [°C] Case temperature indicator (values are expressed in °C).  Status RF  Temperature  2 [°C] 2nd Case temperature indicator (values are expressed in °C). Only in SDTx201 and SDTx501 versions.  Status PSU Temperature PSU temperature indicator (values are expressed in °C).  Status Fan 1 Fan 1 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm). Used in SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 80 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Status Fan 2 Fan 2 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm). Used in SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501.  Status Fan 3 Fan 3 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm). Used in SDTx20, SDTx50, SDTx201 and SDTx501.  Status Fan 4 Fan 4 speed indicator (values are expressed in rpm). Used in SDTx501.  Status CPU Fan Shows the status of the CPU fan.  There are two types of errors:  Fan fault: fan speed equal to zero;  No Fan: the CPU fan is not connected.  FAN_OK  FAN_FAULT  NO_FAN Status FWD Power [dBm] Output forward power indicator (values are expressed in dBm).  Status Reflex Power [dBm] Output reflex power indicator (values are expressed in dBm).  Opto & Relay Relay 0 Selector of Relay 0 mode.  Alarm: indicator of an alarm condition  Mode: indicator of operating mode  RF Status: indicator output RF signal status (on/off) Opto & Relay Relay 1 Selector of Relay 1 mode.  Alarm: indicator of an alarm condition  Mode: indicator of operating mode
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 81 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Opto & Relay Relay 0…3 Relays status indicators.  Green: Alarm on/Mode A/RF Off  Grey: Alarm off/Mode B/RF On Opto&Relay RF OFF RF Off Opto status indicators. Opto 0 is a output RF manual on/off switch:  Closed (0): RF off  Opened (1): RF on (default value)  Green: Closed (0)  Grey: Opened (1) Opto&Relay N.A. NOT AVAILABLE  Switch mode Opto status indicators. When the Switch mode is set to Opto:  Closed (0): Switch to mode B  Opened (1): Switch to mode A  Green: Closed (0)  Grey: Opened (1) Opto&Relay N.A. NOT AVAILABLE  Retry of amplifier alarms status indicators.(only in SDTX 201 version);  Green: Closed (0)  Grey: Opened (1) Opto&Relay Stand-By Stand-by enabling Opto status indicators: .(in version SDTX 20/50/201);  Closed (0): stand-by on  Opened (1): stand-by off Interlock Opto status indicators.(only in SDTX 501 version);  Closed (0): Interlock off  Opened (1): Interlock on Stand-by enabling Opto status indicators  Green: Closed (0)  Grey: Opened (1) Interlock Opto status indicators  Green: Closed (0)  Red: Opened (1) General Channel Output channel. Channel ranges are device’s definition dependant.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 82 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General Offset [Hz] Output frequency offset (expressed in Hz).  Min: -200 kHz  Max: +200 kHz General Power [dBm] Output power (expressed in dBm). Output power ranges are device’s definition dependant. General Power [W] Output power (expressed in W).  General Bandwidth [MHz] The output channel bandwidth. It depends on the device definition. FWD Power Thresholds Warning [dB] Forward power warning threshold expressed in dB.  Min: -16 dB  Max: 0 dB FWD Power Thresholds Alarm [dB] Forward power alarm threshold expressed in dB. Temperature Thresholds Warning [°C] Temperature warning threshold expressed in °C.  Min: 50 °C  Max: 74 °C Temperature Thresholds Alarm [°C] Temperature alarm threshold expressed in °C. GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx Enable send frame Ethernet channel 1 transmission enabling.   Checked: Enabled  Not checked: Disabled
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 83 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx Input It  selects  which  TS  input  shall  be  re-transmitted  on  RTP  output channel 1. This  selection  is  totally  independent  from  the  selection  of  the  TS input to the modulator.   ASI 1  ASI 2  ASI 3  ASI 4  Tuner 1 (if present)  Tuner 2 (if present)  GbE 2 ch1  GbE 2 ch2 GbE ch1/2 Out Status Ethernet transmission on channel 1 status indicator.  Resolving IP Addr.  IP not found  No entry  Transmitting data  Transmitting data multicast  No TS input   ON  OFF
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 84 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values ASI Out 1/2 Input Digital modes: Selects which Transport Stream shall be re-proposed on ASI OUT HP/LP output.  Analog modes: Selects which SDI input shall be re-proposed on ASI OUT HP/LP output.  This selection is totally independent from the selection of the input of the modulator.  Digital: o ASI 1 o ASI 2 o ASI 3 o ASI 4 o Tuner 1 (if present) o Tuner 2 (if present) o GbE 2 ch1 o GbE 2 ch2 o Rate Ad Out  Analog: o SDI 1 o SDI 2 o SDI 3 o SDI 4
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 85 of 206 5.10.1 Reflex Power Management  The  ARK6  is  provided  with  a  reflex  power  control  logic  that  prevents  the  amplifier  stage  from  being permanently damaged. Figure 37. Reflex Pwr Management   If the output reflex power goes over its alarm threshold, the amplifier stage is automatically  shut down and the system reacts to this situation on the basis of the user selectable “Number of attempts”. In the case that the  user sets  a “Number  of attempts”  equal to zero, the red “RFL Power  High” LED is turned on, the “Status” indicator shows “Alarm” and the amplifier stage is shut down by a “Reflex Pwr High Alarm”. In the case that the user sets N as “Number of attempts”, where N is different from zero, a  self test is conducted  to  determine  if  the  system  can  be  successfully  restored.  The  red  “RFL  Power  High”  LED  is turned  on,  the  “Status”  indicator  shows  “Warning”  and  the  amplifier  stage  is  restarted  N  times.  The delay between two consecutive attempts is fixed to 10 seconds. At every RF ON/OFF the “Ampli status” indicator  will  show  “Reflex  Pwr  High  Retry”.  When  the  maximum  number  of attempts  is reached,  the “Status” indicator shows “Alarm” and the amplifier stage is shut down by a “Reflex Pwr High Alarm”.  When  the  “Reflex  Pwr  High  Alarm”  is  on  the  amplifier  stage  is  permanently  shut  down.  Once  the operator has carried out the necessary checks, the amplifier shall be manually reset through the button “Reset”. If  the  RFL  power  control  mechanism  is  in  warning  state  and  the  RFL  power  level  doesn’t  go  over  the alarm threshold for 30 minutes, the amplifier stage is automatically reset. The events associated to the reflex power control logic are the following:  “RFL Power Warning”: the reflex power level is higher than the specification and the “Number of attempts” is different from zero.  “RFL Power OK”: RFL power goes under the alarm threshold.  “RFL  Power  Alarm”:  RFL  power  goes  over  the  alarm  threshold  for  N  times,  where  N  is  the number of attempts specified in the Output page of the Java GUI.  “RFL RF OFF”: The output RF has been switched off because of either a RFL Power Warning (for every attempt to restore the system) or a RFL Power Alarm.  “RFL RF ON ”N”: The output RF has been switched on after attempt number “N”.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 86 of 206 Table 18.  Output window: Reflex Pwr Management Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Reflex Pwr Management Number of attempts The number of attempts to restore the system after RFL power has gone over the alarm threshold.  Min: 0  Max: 255 Reflex Pwr Management Current number of attempt The current number attempt to restore the system.  Min: 0  Max: “Number of attempts” Reflex Pwr Management Status It shows the current status of the Reflex Power.  OK  Warning  Alarm Reflex Pwr Management RFL Power High It shows if RFL power goes over the alarm threshold.  Red: RFL power over the alarm threshold  Grey: RFL power under the alarm threshold Reflex Pwr Management Timeout [s] The timeout between two consecutive attempts. Fixed to 10 seconds Reflex Pwr Management Reset This button resets the amplifier stage when it is switched off due to a Reflex Power High alarm.  Reflex Pwr Management Reset Timeout [s] If the RFL power control mechanism is in warning state and the RFL power level doesn’t go over the alarm threshold for 30 minutes, the amplifier stage is automatically reset.  Fixed to 30 minutes
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 87 of 206 5.11 Network  Click on Network button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the Network management window. Figure 38. Network window   This window allows the Network management on both PRO-MPEG COP 3 RX and TX sides. It also allows the monitoring of the board IP and MAC addresses. Note: The Clock Recovery Function, used in MFN transmissions of received streams on Ethernet channels 1 and/or 2, is based on the timestamps of incoming packets. UDP packets do not contain STS information therefore it is not allowed using GbE inputs with UDP protocol in MFN transmission mode.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 88 of 206 Table 19.  Network window Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values GbE 1/2 General Settings / Network IP address Gbe port 1 / 2 IP address.  GbE 1/2 General Settings / Network MAC address Gbe port 1 / 2 MAC address.  GbE 1/2 General Settings / Network Gateway Gbe port 1 / 2 Gateway address.  GbE 1/2 General Settings / Network Netmask Gbe port 1 / 2 Netmask.  GbE 2 General Settings / Network IGMP Enable Enables the IGMP protocol.  Checked: Enabled  Not checked: Disabled GbE 2 General Settings / Network Source Port Board transmitting port.  Min: 0  Max: 65.535 Trap IP address 1/2/3 Manager Trap 1/2/3 IP addresses.  GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx IP Address Channel 1/2 receiving IP address.  GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx Port Channel 1/2 receiving port.  Min: 0  Max: 65,535
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 89 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx Protocol Ethernet input packets protocol.  UDP/RTP: o Green: Detected o Grey: Not detected GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx Bitrate Bit-rate of TS from Ethernet input.  GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx Filtered bitrate Bit-rate actually used by the modulator.  Zero when the input is not selected  Equal to the total bit-rate, when Delete Null Packets disabled  Less than total bit-rate, when Delete Null Packets enabled GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx Format Received transmission format.  188 Bytes  204 Bytes GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx Lock Ethernet input lock status indicator. The input Transport Stream is locked when no more than two consecutive Sync Byte are missed.  Green: Lock  Grey: Not locked GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx Overflow Input GbE overflow alarm status. This alarm condition occurs when the input bit-rate exceeds the capability of the modulation (Ref. to ETSI EN 302 755).  Red: Alarm on  Grey: Alarm off GbE 2 ch1/2 Rx RTP Clock RTP packets source clock reference.  90 kHz  27 MHz GbE 1 / 2 Statistic GbE Good Pck Total amount of frames delivered to the higher-level protocol.  GbE 1 / 2 Statistic GbE Speed Ethernet connection speed. No duplex information is provided.  10 Mbit//s  100 Mbit//s  1 Gbit/s
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 90 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values GbE 1 / 2 Statistic GbE Bad Pck The number of inbound packets that contained errors.  Community Get Read community setting.  Community Set Set community setting.  Community Trap Trap community setting.  GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx Enable send frame Channel 1/2 Ethernet transmission enabling.   Checked: Enabled  Not checked: Disabled GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx IP Channel 1/2 Ethernet transmission IP address.   GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx Port Port used for RTP/UDP data transmission  Min: 0  Max: 65,535 GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx Status Ethernet transmission on channel 1/2 status indicator.  Resolving IP Addr.  IP not found  No entry  Transmitting data  Transmitting data multicast  ON  OFF GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx Destination MAC Destination MAC address.  GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx SSRC SSRC identifier of the RTP transmission on channel ½.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 91 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx TS Pck per Frame Number of packets per frame.  Min: 1  Max: 7 GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx Frame type Transmission protocol selector.  RTP  UDP GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx TS Format Transmission format.  188 Bytes  204 Bytes GbE 2 ch1/2 Tx RTP Clock RTP packets clock reference.  90 kHz  27 MHz
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 92 of 206 5.12 GPS  Click on GPS button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the GPS received statistics window. Figure 39. GPS window
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 93 of 206 Table 20.  GPS window Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General GPS Software Version The firmware version of the GPS module.  Satellite #Number of Visible sat Number of visible GPS satellites indicator.  Satellite #Number of Tracked sat Number of tracked GPS satellites indicator.  Satellite Ublox GPS Lock Ublox GPS Lock status. This LED shows the GPS lock status derived from live data provided by the GPS receiver through a proprietary protocol.  Green: GPS Locked  Red: GPS Not Locked Position Latitude (°) Site latitude expressed in degrees.  Position Longitude (°) Site longitude expressed in degrees.  Date & Time UTC Time Current time indicator. Each GPS satellite has an atomic clock and continually transmits messages containing the current time and date at the start of the message sent by the GPS itself.  Date & Time UTC Date Current date indicator.  Each GPS satellite has an atomic clock and continually transmits messages containing the current time and date at the start of the message send by the GPS itself.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 94 of 206 5.12.1 Holdover Management  The ARK6 includes a holdover function provided by a higher grade Oven-Controlled Crystal Oscillator. Figure 40. Holdover Management   The  ARK6  is  equipped  with  an  internal  OCXO  for  improved  phase  noise  and  stability.  The  system  is provided  with  internal 10MHz  and  1PPS  signals  which are  disciplined to  the GPS time signal  or to the 10MHz  and  1PPS  external  references.  The  stability  of  internal  frequency  and  phase  is  assured  by  the highly stable OCXO. If the satellites signal, from the GPS receiver, or the external reference sources are completely lost, the Holdover mode enables the unit to keep working with internal 10MHz and 1PPS for the duration of the Holdover Timeout, with very low drift over time. If the timeout period elapses prior to regain the lock of the selected clock reference source and the Holdover function is enabled, the alarm “Holdover” is raised. Depending on the conditions, the Holdover function can work in one of the following state: 1. Holdover OFF  Condition 1: the clock reference is changed and the OCXO is not locked yet.  Condition 2: the input clock reference is not present.  Associated event: “Holdover OFF”- 2. SFN Ready  Condition:  the  OCXO  is  locked  to  the  selected  frequency  reference  and  the system is waiting for the OCXO stabilization.  Associated event: “Holdover SFN Ready”. 3. Holdover Ready  Condition 1: the OCXO is stable and the Holdover function is now available.  Condition 2: the system quit the Holdover mode because the OCXO regain the lock to the selected clock reference.  Associated event: “Holdover Ready”.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 95 of 206 4. Holdover ON  Condition: if the OCXO is no more locked to the selected frequency reference and the Holdover function is enabled and available, the equipment enters into holdover mode.  Associated event: “Holdover ON”. 5. Holdover TMO Expired  Condition: the Holdover state is “Holdover ON” (the function is enabled) and the  Holdover  timeout  period  elapses  prior  to  regain  the  lock  of  the  selected clock reference source.  Associated event: “Holdover TMO Expired”.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 96 of 206 Table 21.  GPS window: Holdover Management Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values General Fine Frequency Adjust Internal frequency reference fine tuning setting. It is possible to increase and decrease the frequency offset of the OCXO with reference to the 10MHz clock by 1/21 Hz steps using the Fine Frequency Adjust. This field is accessible only if the Frequency Reference selector is set to Internal  Min: 0  Max: 1,048,575 General Data to Flash The saved DAC value during the stabilization process of the OCXO. It represents the last saved frequency offset of the OCXO, expressed in 1/21 Hz steps, with respect to the selected frequency reference source. Using External or GPS as frequency reference, the last saved Data to Flash value will be:  retained after a software reset;  reinitialized to zero after a hardware reset (unit powered down and powered back up). Using Internal as frequency reference, the last saved Data to Flash value will be overwritten with the Fine Frequency Adjust value after:  a software reset;  an hardware reset;  setting to Internal the frequency reference.  Min: 0  Max: 1,048,575 OCXO 10MHz Lock Shows the lock status of the OCXO to the external 10MHz reference.  Red: Not Locked  Green: Locked OCXO 1PPS lock Shows the lock status of the OCXO to the external 1PPS reference.  Red: Not Locked  Green: Locked
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 97 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values OCXO GPS Lock OCXO locked to the external GPS reference.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not Locked OCXO Tracking It shows whenever the OCXO is not locked to the selected frequency reference or not.  Green: Locked  Grey: Not Locked OCXO SFN Ready It shows whenever the OCXO is locked to the selected frequency reference and the system is waiting for the OCXO stabilization or not.  Green: SFN Ready  Grey: SFN Not Ready OCXO Holdover Ready It shows whenever the Holdover function is available or not.  Green: Holdover Ready  Grey: Holdover Not Ready OCXO Holdover It notifies that the equipment entered into Holdover mode  Green: Holdover On  Grey: Holdover Off Holdover Management Holdover Enable Enables the Holdover mechanism.  Checked: Enabled  Not checked: Disabled Holdover Management Holdover Timeout [h] Sets the timeout of the Holdover in hour.  Min: 0 h  Max: 24 h Holdover Management Status The status of the Holdover mechanism.  OFF  SFN Ready  Ready  ON  Expired
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 98 of 206 Box Parameter / Control Description Admitted Ranges / Values Holdover Management Timeout Status The countdown of the Holdover timeout.  Min:00:00:00  Max: “Holdover Timeout [s]”
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 99 of 206 5.13 Alarms  Click on Alarms button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the alarms management window. Figure 41. Alarms window   The Alarms window allows the setting of alarm  masks and the monitoring of alarms status. Use alarm masks to select how and which alarm have to be notified. Masks  are  organized  in  columns.  The  twelve  columns  represent  twelve  destinations  of  each  alarm notification:  GUI: the selected alarms status is notified on the Java alarm page icon.  LCD: the selected alarms status is notified on LCD display lighting the alarm button and listing the alarms in the Alarms menu.  Event:  the  selected  alarms  status  generate  an  alarm  event  that  will  be  logged  in  the  event memory (refer to Events paragraph).  RELAY0…3: the selected alarms switch on the corresponding relay.  T1…T3:  the  selected  alarms  generate  the  corresponding  trap  messages  (refer  to  Network paragraph to set destination IP addresses).  RF: the selected alarms switch off the output RF signal. The RF mask is almost entirely fixed in order to avoid device damages or malfunctioning.  SWITCH: the selected alarms trigger the automatic input switching, if enabled. In the Alarms window, when an alarm condition occurs, the relative alarm is red highlighted. The Total check boxes enable all alarms-to-masks associations.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 100 of 206 Table 22.  Alarms window Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) Temperature Absolute High Case temperature over 75°C, the maximum endurable limit.  Check alarm and warning thresholds  Lower the output power to decrease internal temperature  Check the device airflow  Check fans C 1 Temperature Alarm (-3dB) Temperature level goes over the alarm threshold. The output power is consequently lowered by 3 dB (always within the admitted power range). C 0 Temperature Warning Temperature level goes over the warning threshold. C 0 Fans Speed Low One of the fans speed is under the minimum speed level (2,000 rpm).  Check fans connections  Verify that fans are not damaged; in this case substitute them. The substitution can be performed during device normal operations C 0 Alim Dialog Err Communication errors between the main board and the power supply board.  Hardware fault C 1 FE Dialog Err Communication errors between the main board and the Front-End board.  Hardware fault C 1 Meas Dialog Err Communication errors between the main board and the Measure board.  Hardware fault C 1
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 101 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) GPS Not Locked GPS signal is not locked by either the OCXO or the GPS receiver. The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when GPS is not used as clock reference or when the GPS Communication Error is raised.  Check cable and GPS antenna connections  Hardware fault C 1 GPS Dialog Err Communication errors between main board and  GPS board. The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when GPS is not used as clock reference.  Hardware fault C 1 120MHz Not Locked 120 MHz is not locked. The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when the Signal 10 MHz Not Locked alarm is raised or when GPS is used as clock reference and GPS alarm (GPS Not Locked, GPS Dialog Err) is raised.  In SFN configuration, when selected TS input or MIP are not detected, 120 MHz oscillator can lose the lock  Hardware fault C 1 960MHz Not Locked 960 MHz is not locked.  Hardware fault C 1 Input PLL Not Locked Input PLL not locked alarm  Hardware fault C 1 Output PLL Not Locked Output PLL not locked alarm  Hardware fault C 1 Bad File In File System One or more of the following files are not present in the File System:  Check files list C 1
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 102 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) *.cfg *.drlin *.ochf *.fpga6 *.snmp *.htm *.jar *.def *.pwr2 *.sav *.cdef2 *.gpsf  Reload the file system 10MHz Not Locked 10 MHz is not locked.  If the frequency reference is Internal: OCXO fault  If the frequency reference is External:  o OCXO fault o Lack of external 10 MHz o Hardware fault  If the frequency reference is GPS:  o Check GPS alarms o OCXO fault  o Hardware fault C 1
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 103 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) 1PPS Not Locked 1PPS is not locked to the selected frequency reference.  If the frequency reference is Internal: OCXO fault  If the frequency reference is External:  o OCXO fault o Lack of external 1PPS o Hardware fault  If the frequency reference is GPS:  o Check GPS alarms o OCXO fault  o Hardware fault C 1 FPGA Boot alarm FPGA boot has not been successfully completed.  Restart the machine  Reload the file system C 1 Forward Power High FWD power goes over the maximum endurable limit.  Hardware fault C 1 Forward Power Low Warning FWD power level goes over the warning threshold.  Check alarm and warning thresholds  At every amplifier initialization the FWD power alarm and warning are temporary on  Amplifier is not properly working, hardware fault C 0 Forward Power Low Alarm FWD power level goes over the alarm threshold. C 0 Reflex Power High RFL power goes over the set power -9 dB.  Check the RF output for disconnection or wrong impendence adaptation C 0 File System Error File System loading error.  File system partition damage C 1
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 104 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) PS Voltage Out Of Range Power Supply voltage out of range. This alarm is risen when at least one of the following conditions is met:  PS 26V < 24V or > 28V  PS1/PS2 50V < 45V or > 55V  Hardware fault C 1 PS Current Out Of Range Power Supply current out of range. This alarm is risen when at least one of the following conditions is met:  PS Current 26V > 8A  PS1/PS2 Current 50V> 18A  Hardware fault C 1 CPU Fan Error CPU fan speed equal to zero or CPU fan not connected.  Check fan connection C 1 Test Mode The equipment is generating a test signal.  Disable the test signal C 0 FE S2 Not Locked Lock state indicator of the satellite feed.  Check input signal and cable C X FE S2 S/N Low Front-End S/N measure goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable C X FE S2 BER High Front-End BER measure goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable C X FE S2 Global Alarm    C X [DVB-T2] No Input Selected TS input not locked.  Check input cable  Check input statistics T2 X
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 105 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [DVB-T2] Input Overflow Selected TS input overflow.  Check the capability of the current modulation scheme  Check if the configuration has been loaded T2 X [DVB-T2] FE Not Locked Logical AND between FE TS lock and FE demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to 6).  Check input signal and cable T2 X [DVB-T2] FE Squelch Front-End Squelch level goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T2 X [DVB-T2] FE Pre LDPC BER High Front-End Pre LDPC BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T2 X [DVB-T2] FE SNR Low Front-End SNR goes under the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T2 X [DVB-T2] FE MER Low Front-End MER goes under the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T2 X [DVB-T2] FE Signal Quality Low Front-End Signal Quality goes under the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T2 X [DVB-T2] MEAS Not Locked Logical AND between Meas TS lock and Meas demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to 6).  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T2 0 [DVB-T2] MEAS Pre LDPC BER High Measure Pre LDPC BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T2 0 [DVB-T2] MEAS SNR Low Measure SNR goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T2 0
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 106 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [DVB-T2] MEAS MER Low Measure MER goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T2 0 [DVB-T2] MEAS Signal Quality Low Measure Signal Quality goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T2 0 [DVB-T2] T2-MI Err The logical OR of the following conditions:  CRC of incoming T2-MI pkts is not correct.  The Network mode is SFN but the selected Parameters Source is not T2-MI Parameters.  Check input signal T2 1 [DVB-T2] T2-MIP Err T2-MIP errors  Check input signal T2 X [DVB-T2] Holdover An alarm that is raised when the Holdover function is enabled and the set timeout period elapsed prior to regain the lock of the frequency reference.  Check input frequency reference source. T2 X [DVB-T2] PPS Phase 1PPS is not lock to a source reference common to the network. This alarm is available only when the frequency reference is external.  Check 1PPS  Hardware fault T2 X [DVB-T2] Configuration Not Loaded Some configuration parameters have been changed and the current configuration has not been loaded yet.  Load the configuration through the Load Config button in DVB-T2 Processing window T2 X [DVB-T2] FE LDPC Mean Err RF input LDPC iteration per minute goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal T2 X
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 107 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [DVB-T2] MEAS LDPC Mean Err RF output LDPC iteration per minute goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal T2 0 [DVB-T2] SFN Alarm The logical OR of the following conditions:  T2-MI Timestamp error.  T2-MI Timestamp wrong CRC.  T2-MI Timestamp not present.  The Holdover status is either OFF or TMO Expired. The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when the [DVB-T2] T2-MI Err alarm is on and when the Network mode is MFN.  Check input signal T2 X [DVB-T] Input Not present Alarm Seamless improper working warning One or both Seamless logic input of the current mode isn’t locked. This alarm is enable only in Tx DVBT mode  Check connection status of physical input associated to logic input   Check type and source of input associated to logic input   Hardware fault T 0
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 108 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [DVB-T] Input Not valid Alarm Seamless improper working warning An error has been detected on Logical seamless input. The possible errors which may be detected on input are:  PAT error  MIP error  TS synchronization  Packet jitter  Transport error  ASI word error When the alarm is detected, an event (if event mask is enabled on alarm mask) shows the cause of the error. The cause shown is only one, and it is the heaviest one. The priority in the errors is as previously listed (the heaviest error cause is the one listed in the bottom of the list, and so on).  Check input signal  Check cable connection status  Hardware fault T 0 [DVB-T] MIP Delay High Seamless improper working warning This alarm is high when the MIP in one of the seamless inputs of the current mode, is not in its expected position. This can be caused by a too high delay on the input.  Check cable connections  Check Network delay  Hardware Fault T 0 [DVB-T] No Input Selected TS input not locked. It could be either ASI or Tuner input.  Check input cable  Check input statistics T X [DVB-T] Input Overflow Selected TS input overflow.  Check the capability of the current modulation scheme T X
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 109 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [DVB-T] MIP Err MIP packets missing. This alarm’s RF OFF mask should always be enabled. Alarm raising limitations: The monitoring of this alarm is enabled only when the device has SFN modulation enabled. The monitoring of this alarm is disabled when a No Input alarm is raised.  Check input signal T 1 [DVB-T] PPS Phase 1PPS is not lock to a source reference common to the network. This alarm is available only when the frequency reference is external.  Check 1PPS  Hardware fault T X [DVB-T] SFN Alarm Seamless improper working warning This alarm is high when the Network delay is greater than the Maximum delay or when the internal counter, used to compute the System delay is not locked to 1PPS. This alarm shall always be enabled in the RF Off alarm mask.  Check cable connections  Check Network delay  Check 1PPS  Hardware Fault T 1 [DVB-T] FE Not Locked Logical AND between FE TS lock and FE demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to 6).  Check input signal and cable T X [DVB-T] FE Squelch Front-End Squelch level goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T X [DVB-T] FE Pre Viterbi BER High Front-End Pre Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T X [DVB-T] FE SNR Low Front-End SNR goes under the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T X
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 110 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [DVB-T] FE MER Low Front-End MER goes under the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T X [DVB-T] FE Signal Quality Low Front-End Signal Quality goes under the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable T X [DVB-T] MEAS Not Locked Logical AND between Meas TS lock and Meas demodulator ready (SyncStat equals to 6).  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T 0 [DVB-T] MEAS Pre Viterbi BER High Measure Pre Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T 0 [DVB-T] MEAS SNR Low Measure SNR goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T 0 [DVB-T] MEAS MER Low Measure MER goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T 0 [DVB-T] MEAS Signal Quality Low Measure Signal Quality goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded T 0 [DVB-T] Holdover An alarm that is raised when the Holdover function is enabled and the set timeout period elapsed prior to regain the lock of the frequency reference.  Check input frequency reference source. T X [ITU] No video input Selected input not locked.  Check input cable  Check input statistics ITU X
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 111 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [ITU] Input Wrong Standard Selected Input video standard (525 or 625 lines) not compatible with the ARK6 definition standard.  Check input format  Check input statistics ITU X [ITU] Holdover An alarm that is raised when the Holdover function is enabled and the set timeout period elapsed prior to regain the lock of the frequency reference.  Check input frequency reference source. ITU X [ISDB-T] Input Error   ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] IIP Modulation Error   ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] 1PPS Phase 1PPS is not lock to a common reference of the network. This alarm is available only when the frequency reference is external.  Check 1PPS  Hardware fault ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] System delay   ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] IIP SFN error   ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] Network delay   ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] Rate error Layer A The layer Rate alarm is on when the layer input bitrate is over/under the expected bitrate.  Expected bit-rate depends on modulation parameter setting  Check input bitrate  Check modulation parameter setting ISDB-T X
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 112 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [ISDB-T] Rate error Layer B The layer Rate alarm is on when the layer input bitrate is over/under the expected bitrate.  Expected bit-rate depends on modulation parameter setting  Check input bitrate  Check modulation parameter setting ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] Rate error Layer C The layer Rate alarm is on when the layer input bitrate is over/under the expected bitrate.  Expected bit-rate depends on modulation parameter setting  Check input bitrate  Check modulation parameter setting ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer A Table NOT inserted before next request to insert arrive  Check the Table Bitrate  Check input Bitrate  Check modulation parameter setting ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer B Table NOT inserted before next request to insert arrive  Check the Table Bitrate  Check input Bitrate  Check modulation parameter setting ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer C Table NOT inserted before next request to insert arrive  Check the Table Bitrate  Check input Bitrate  Check modulation parameter setting ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] MEAS not locked   Check the configuration  Check if the configuration has been loaded ISDB-T 0 [ISDB-T] MEAS CN Low   ISDB-T 0
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 113 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer A Measure MER goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Hardware fault ISDB-T 0 [ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer B Measure MER goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Hardware fault ISDB-T 0 [ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer C Measure MER goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Hardware fault ISDB-T 0 [ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer A Measure Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Hardware fault ISDB-T 0 [ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer B Measure Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Hardware fault ISDB-T 0 [ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer C Measure Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration  Hardware fault ISDB-T 0 [ISDB-T] FE Not Locked    ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE Squelch Front-End Squelch level goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE CN Low   ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE MER Layer A Front-End MER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable ISDB-T X
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 114 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [ISDB-T] FE MER Layer B Front-End MER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE MER Layer C Front-End MER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer A Front-End Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer B Front-End Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer C Front-End Pre-Viterbi BER goes over the alarm threshold.  Check input signal and cable ISDB-T X [ISDB-T] FE Emergency Flag   ISDB-T X [ATSC] No Input Selected input is not present. It could be either ASI or Tuner input.  Check input cable  Check input statistics ATSC X [ATSC] Input Overflow Selected TS input overflow.  Check input signal ATSC X [ATSC] MH Err MH error.  Check input signal ATSC X [ATSC] MEAS Demodulator Not Locked ATSC demodulator of the Measure board not locked.  Check the configuration ATSC 0
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 115 of 206 Alarm Description and limitations Troubleshooting Mode(2) RF mask (1) [ATSC] MEAS SNR Low Measure SNR goes under the alarm threshold.  Check the configuration ATSC 0 [ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked ATSC demodulator of the Front-End board not locked.  Check input signal ATSC X [ATSC] FE SNR Low Front-End SNR goes under the alarm threshold.  Check input signal ATSC X [ATSC] No TVCT Input TVCT table not present.  Check input signal ATSC X  Notes to the table: (1)  0/1 stands for disabled/enabled and is fixed, X stands for not fixed. (2)  C stands for Common alarm. T2/T/ATSC/ITU/ISDB-T specifies the mode the alarm belongs to. Alarms are divided in two different classes: common  alarms and mode-specific alarms. Common alarms are those which are HW dependant or are dependent on how the operating system has been designed. Common alarms are shared by all the operational modes. Mode-specific alarms are those which depend on the implemented functionalities and standards. Mode-specific alarms can be easily recognized thanks to the addition of the mode prefix enclosed in squared brackets.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 116 of 206 5.14 Events  Click on Events button, highlighted in the next figure, to access the events windows. Figure 42. Events window   Open the Events window to slide the events list. Events are reported with the following information:  Time: event detection time.  Date: event detection date.  Type: type of event: o Alarm; o Command; o Event; o System Init.  Description: event description: o if  the  event  type  is  Alarm:  which  alarm  generated  the  event  followed  by  “ON”  or “OFF”; o if the event type is Command: the low level code and command source; o if the event type is Event: event description; o if the event type is System Init: system initialization, followed by the alarm in case of error.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 117 of 206 Each event type is characterized by a different colour, the following list explain the mean of each colour:  Red: alarm (refer to alarms list in Alarms paragraph and to Alarms list table);  Green: command (See ARK6_SW_Reference manual_v1_0.doc for further information);  Blue: system Init (refer to System Initialization Event paragraph);   Black:  o Event (refer to Events list table); o TASK_ERR (refer to Task Error Event paragraph); o SYS_ERR (refer to System Error Event paragraph).  Use the following buttons, sited on the right side of the window, to manage the Events list:  Clear: resets the events list.  Get History: gets all the stored events from the last board reset (max 512 events). Table 23.  Events descriptions list Description-Event Event Description RF OFF enabled from OPTO RF output switched off through OPTO 0. RF OFF dis. from OPTO RF output switched on through OPTO 0. Stand-by ON from OPTO Stand-by mode enabled through OPTO 3. Stand-by ON from LCD Stand-by mode enabled through LCD button or OPTO 3. Stand-by ON CPU Fan Err Stand-by mode enabled because of a CPU Fan error. Stand-by OFF Stand-by mode disabled through LCD button. Power = xx.x dBm (Local) New output power setting. xx.x: output power expressed in dBm. Update file *.xxxx New file loading. xxxx: file extension. P5K open: xx.xx.xx.xx Connection to port 5000 open. xx.xx.xx.xx: host IP address. P5K closed Connection to port 5000 closed. File system busy File system already in use while trying to employ it (e.g. change mode during a file loading). Mode = (mode) Manual change mode. mode:   "OFF",   "ISDBT",   "ITU",   "DVB-T",   "ATSC",  "DVB-T2",   "ECHO",   "Rep. Analog",   "Rep. Digital". UTC Time set from GPS Time and date set by GPS. As soon as the GPS lock is regained, once lost, and if the current time and date are different from the GPS ones, the UTC time is set by GPS.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 118 of 206 Description-Event Event Description PS Restart N This event is reported when one of the following alarms is raised:  PS1/2 50V voltage out range  PS1/2 50V current out of range The fourth time one of the preceding alarms is raised the amplifier is restarted (from 1 up to 4 times). N: number of amplifier restarting. Only in SDTX 201 and 501 versions. PS OFF After the fourth time the amplifier has been restarted, if an alarm condition causing a PS Restart event occurs, PS OFF event is reported and the amplifier is turned off When this event is reported amplifier can be turned on only by OPTO 2 or by the Restart button in the Output window (only in SDTX 201 and 501 versions). Restart Amp. from OPTO This event is reported when the retry command is given by the Retry Alarm OPTO (OPTO 2). PS ON This event is reported at every amplifier restarting  Events List cleared This event is reported when the events list is cleared. Updating string fw... This event is reported when the update of the FPGA firmware starts. String values:   "ISDBT",   "ITU",   "DVB-T",   "ATSC",  "DVB-T2",   "ECHO",   "Rep. Analog",   "Rep. Digital". FPGA firmware err xx This event is reported when an error occurs during the update of the FPGA firmware. xx: error code:  0x10, 0x20, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03: programming error;  0x11: firmware not found in FS (for the current mode);  0x22: FPGA file opening error;  0x33: FPGA file reading error;  0x44: erasing FLASH memory block error. FPGA firmware OK New FPGA firmware successfully loaded. Saving config… Saving configuration task started (after the command “s” given by RS232 or GbE commands). Save config Finished Saving configuration task correctly ended. Save config error: xx An error occurs during saving configuration. xx: error code:  0x80: File system busy;  0x01: New *.sav file opening error;  0x02: uC header writing error;  0x03: uC data writing error;  0x04: FPGA header writing error;  0x05: FPGA data writing error;  0x07: File date writing error;  0x08: Old *.sav file deleting error  0x09: New file naming error (deleting of “*”);  0x0A: File date writing error it can’t be found into the FS   0x10: file already opened. Pwr adjusted to xx.x dBm New output power setting due to a set value exceeding the mode specific power range. xx.x: output power expressed in dBm.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 119 of 206 Description-Event Event Description In. AUTO switch to string When Input Select Mode is set on Autoswitch and the selected input is not locked the device switch to the next available locked input (refer to Task Error Event paragraph) and this event is generated. string:  ASI1  ASI2  ASI3  ASI4  Tuner  RxCh1  RxCh2 Forced  = mode If the device is in Mode A and the selected working mode is disabled by default (as established in the MODE_DIS field of the *.def file), the next available working mode is forced. mode:   "ISDBT",   "ITU",   "DVB-T",   "ATSC",  "DVB-T2",   "ECHO",   "Rep. Analog",   "Rep. Digital". Forced Ch In A= string Channel input. Forced ChOut A= string Channel output. Forced reset for IIC err An IIC error forced the board reset. =>string err status It notifies witch file generated the Bad file in File System alarm. string: file extension status: ON or OFF ERR on delete file ‘string‘ After a FS file update the old file is renamed and then deleted. This event is reported when the deletion of the old file during the system initialization does not succeed. string: file extension. Delete file ‘string‘ FS file deleted. string: file extension. Init FS date This event is reported once time and date table of the File System is initialized for the first time. Error init FS date xx An error occurs during FS initialization. xx: error code:  0x01: EEPROM data reading error;  0x02: EEPROM data writing error;  0x03: CRC error in time and date table. Error on delete *.string FS file deleting error. string: file extension. S1/S2 changed, P1 loading Automatic update of P1 symbol. This event is reported at every system initialization and, in T2-MI mode, when S1 and S2 fields of incoming T2-MI pkts change. Saving drlin … Saving linear coefficients task started (after the command “p2” given by RS232 or GbE commands). Saving drlin Finished Saving linear coefficients task correctly ended.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 120 of 206 Description-Event Event Description Save drlin err: xx An error occurs during saving linear precorrection coefficients. xx: error code:  0x80: File system busy;  0x01: New *.drlin file opening error;  0x02: number of coefficients information writing error;  0x03: linear coefficients writing error;  0x07: File date writing error;  0x08: Old *.drlin file deleting error  0x09: New file naming error (deleting of “*”);  0x10: file already opened;  0x0A: File date writing error it can’t be found into the FS. New T2MI PID N New T2-MI PID found by the Automatic T2-MI PID Mode mechanism. IIC Error IIC bus error DVB-T2 params err xx An error occurs during T2 parameters loading. xx: error code:  0x01: P1 symbol loading error;  0x02: P1 symbol loading error due to a not valid T2-MI input. Re-start mode When DVB-T2 params err 01 occurs during T2 parameters loading, the FPGA firmware is reloaded and this event is generated. DVB-T2 preset err xx An error occurs during T2 preset configuration loading. xx: error code:  0x80: File system busy;  0x01: *.t2cfg file opening error;  0x02: *.t2cfg file header reading error;  0x03: the selected configuration is corrupted;  0x04: preset configuration data too big;  0x05: memory allocation error;  0x06: *.t2cfg file header reading error;  0x09: *.t2cfg file not found;  0x10: the selected configuration is not present. RFL Power Warning RFL power goes over the alarm threshold for the first time and the “Number of attempts” is different from zero. RFL Power OK RFL power goes under the alarm threshold. RFL Power Alarm RFL power goes over the alarm threshold for N times, where N is the number of attempts specified in the Output page of the Java GUI. RFL RF ON ”N” When RFL power goes over the alarm threshold the system switch off and on the output RF signal for a maximum number of times. N is the current number of attempt. T2-MI Autodetect PID OK The Automatic T2-MI PID detection has been put across T2MI PID PAT Err During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, PAT has not been found in the input Transport Stream. T2-MI PID Not Valid During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, no PIDs with stream type x06 has been found in the PMT. T2MI PID PMT Err During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, more than one PID with stream type x06 has been found in the PMT. T2-MI PID Not Found During Automatic T2-MI PID operations, the detected T2-MI PID has not been found in the input Transport Stream Freq Ref Forced: GPS If the Network mode is SFN but the clock reference is set to Internal, the frequency reference is automatically forced to GPS and this event is generated. Freq Ref set to string Event generated at every new Frequency Reference selection. string: the clock reference  External  Internal  GPS
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 121 of 206 Description-Event Event Description Holdover OFF Condition 1: the clock reference is changed and the OCXO is not locked yet. Condition 2: the input clock reference is not present. Holdover SFN Ready The OCXO is locked to the selected frequency reference and the system is waiting for the OCXO stabilization. Holdover Ready Condition 1: the OCXO is stable and the Holdover function is now available. Condition 2: the system quit the Holdover mode because the OCXO regain the lock to the selected clock reference. Holdover ON If the OCXO is no more locked to the selected frequency reference and the Holdover function is enabled and available, the equipment enters in holdover mode. Holdover TMO Expired Condition: the Holdover state is “ON” (the function is enabled) and the Holdover timeout period elapses prior to regain the lock of the selected clock reference source. Fan N Speed string It notifies which fan caused the Fans Speed Low alarm. string:   Low;  OK Updating GPS fw… This event is reported when the update of the GPS firmware starts. GPS firmware err xx This event is reported when an error occurs during the update of the GPS firmware. xx: error code:  0x80: File system busy;  0x01: firmware not found in FS (for the current mode);  0x02: GPS file opening error;  0x03: GPS file reading error;  0x06:GPS fw transferring into buffer error. GPS firmware OK New GPS firmware successfully loaded. Updating GPS fw (NILL)… When an error occurs during the update of the GPS firmware, the system reloads the Nill firmware prior to attempt another update.  The  following  table  lists  the  descriptions  of  all  the  alarm  type  events  (refer  to  Alarms  paragraph  for further information about alarms). Table 24.  Alarms descriptions list Alarm Description-Alarm Temperature Absolute High Temp. High Temperature Alarm (-3dB) Temp. High -3dB Temperature Warning Temp. High Warning Fans Speed Low Fans Speed Low Alim Dialog Err Alim Dialog Err FE Dialog Err FE Dialog Err Meas Dialog Err Meas Dialog Err GPS Dialog Err GPS Dialog Err GPS Not Locked GPS Not Locked 120MHz Not Locked 120MHz Not Locked
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 122 of 206 Alarm Description-Alarm 960MHz Not Locked 960MHz Not Locked Input PLL Not Locked Input PLL Not Locked Output PLL Not Locked Out PLL Not Locked 10MHz Not Locked 10MHz Not Locked 1PPS Not Locked 1PPS Not Locked FPGA Boot Error FPGA Boot Err Forward Power High FWD Power High Forward Power Low Warning FWD Pwr Low Warning Forward Power Low Alarm FWD Pwr Low Reflex Power High Reflex Power High File System Error File System Err Bad File In File System File Err PS Voltage Out Of Range PS1 V Out Of Range PS Current Out Of Range PS1 I Out Of Range CPU Fan Error CPU Fan Error Test Mode Test Mode FE S2 Not Locked FE S2 not locked FE S2 S/N Low FE S2 SNR Low FE S2 BER High FE S2 BER high FE S2 Global Alarm  [DVB-T2] No Input No Input [DVB-T2] Input Overflow Input overflow [DVB-T2] FE Not Locked FE Not Locked [DVB-T2] FE Squelch FE Squelch [DVB-T2] FE Pre LDPC BER High FE Pre LDPC BER [DVB-T2] FE SNR Low FE SNR Low [DVB-T2] FE MER Low FE MER Low [DVB-T2] FE Signal Quality Low FE S.Quality Low [DVB-T2] MEAS Not Locked Meas Not Locked [DVB-T2] MEAS Pre LDPC BER High Meas Pre LDPC BER [DVB-T2] MEAS SNR Low Meas SNR Low
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 123 of 206 Alarm Description-Alarm [DVB-T2] MEAS MER Low Meas MER Low [DVB-T2] MEAS Signal Quality Low Meas S.Quality Low [DVB-T2] T2-MI Err T2-MI Err [DVB-T2] T2-MIP Err T2-MIP Err [DVB-T2] Holdover Holdover [DVB-T2] PPS Phase PPS Phase [DVB-T2] Configuration Not Loaded Cfg. Not Loaded [DVB-T2] FE LDPC Mean Err FE LDPC Mean Err [DVB-T2] MEAS LDPC Mean Err MEAS LDPC Mean Err [DVB-T2] SFN Alarm SFN Alarm code  code: Bit[0]: the Holdover function is enabled and the OCXO is not locked yet Bit[1]: the Timestamp is not present Bit[2]: wrong Timestamp CRC Bit[3]: wrong Timestamp Bit[4]: SFN Resynch [DVB-T] Input Not Present Input not present [DVB-T] Input Not valid Alarm Input not valid [DVB-T] MIP Delay High MIP delay high [DVB-T] No Input Input not detected [DVB-T] Input Overflow Input overflow [DVB-T] MIP Err MIP error [DVB-T] PPS Phase PPS phase wrong [DVB-T] SFN Alarm SFN Alarm [DVB-T] FE Not Locked FE Not Locked [DVB-T] FE Squelch FE Squelch [DVB-T] FE Pre Viterbi BER High FE Pre Vit BER [DVB-T] FE SNR Low FE SNR Low [DVB-T] FE MER Low FE MER Low [DVB-T] FE Signal Quality Low FE S.Quality Low [DVB-T] MEAS Not Locked Meas Not Locked [DVB-T] MEAS Pre Viterbi BER High Meas Pre Vit BER
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 124 of 206 Alarm Description-Alarm [DVB-T] MEAS SNR Low Meas SNR Low [DVB-T] MEAS MER Low Meas MER Low [DVB-T] MEAS Signal Quality Low Meas S.Quality Low [DVB-T] Holdover Holdover [ITU] No Video Input Input not detect [ITU] Input wrong format Wrong standard [ITU] Holdover Holdover [ISDB-T] Input Error Input not valid [ISDB-T] IIP Modulation Error IIP error [ISDB-T] 1PPS Phase PPS phase wrong [ISDB-T] System delay System delay alarm [ISDB-T] IIP SFN error IIP SFN err [ISDB-T] Network delay Network Delay [ISDB-T] Rate error Layer A Layer A Err Rate [ISDB-T] Rate error Layer B Layer B Err Rate [ISDB-T] Rate error Layer C Layer C Err Rate [ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer A Lay A Table ovfl [ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer B Lay B Table ovfl [ISDB-T] Table Overflow Layer C Lay C Table ovfl [ISDB-T] MEAS not locked Meas Not Locked [ISDB-T] MEAS CN Low Meas C/N Low [ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer A Meas MER A Low [ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer B Meas MER B Low [ISDB-T] MEAS MER Layer C Meas MER C Low [ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer A Meas Pre Vit A BER [ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer B Meas Pre Vit B BER [ISDB-T] MEAS Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer C Meas Pre Vit C BER [ISDB-T] FE Not Locked FE Not Locked [ISDB-T] FE Squelch FE Squelch
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 125 of 206 Alarm Description-Alarm [ISDB-T] FE CN Low FE C/N Low [ISDB-T] FE MER Layer A FE MER A Low [ISDB-T] FE MER Layer B FE MER B Low [ISDB-T] FE MER Layer C FE MER C Low [ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer A FE Pre Vit A BER [ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer B FE Pre Vit B BER [ISDB-T] FE Pre-Viterbi BER High Layer C FE Pre Vit C BER [ISDB-T] FE Emergency Flag FE emergency flag [ATSC] No Input Input not valid [ATSC] Input Overflow Input overflow [ATSC] MH Err MH Error [ATSC] MEAS Demodulator Not Locked Meas Not Locked [ATSC] MEAS SNR Low Meas SNR Low [ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked FE Not Locked [ATSC] FE SNR Low FE SNR Low [ATSC] No TVCT TVCT Not Present
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 126 of 206 5.14.1 Date and Time Setting  The upper part of the event window shows the actual time and date and allows the manual setting of those parameters. Figure 43. Time and date setting   Click to each part of the date and time to change the parameter and then increase or decrease its value with the up/down arrows. Note: When the onboard GPS receiver is locked and GPS frequency reference is enabled, the date and time information are received by GPS satellite and updated every thirty seconds. The board incorporates  a rechargeable battery to maintain  the time when  there isn’t  a  power supply. The  battery  supplies  the  clock  for  two  or  three  days,  after  that  the  time  shall be reset  either  by  char interface, or LCD display, or Java interface or selecting the GPS as frequency reference.  5.14.2 Task Error Event  The watchdog performs a periodic (every 20 seconds) polling of tasks and triggers a system reset if one or more tasks do not answer, restarting the Code loader (See Codeloader_Operations_Note_v1.1.doc for further information) and generating a TSK ERR event as follows:   The blue underlined 32-bits word is the enabling status of the alarms mask. The red underlined 32-bits word  indicates  the  status  of  tasks  (1  if  the  task  has  been  successfully  performed,  otherwise  0)  as specified in the following table: Table 25.  Task error event specific data TASK Description Bit WD_FAN_TASK This task controls fans speed on the basis of the board temperature. 0 WD_UPCV_TASK This task controls the Up-converter status. 1 WD_GPS_TASK This task controls the GPS status. 2 WD_STATUS_TASK This task gathers quite all the board information in order to perform the following operations:  It updates all variables of the system;  It manages alarms;  It manages the RF status (e.g. on, off…);  It manages the mode switch;  It manages the ARP resolution in DVB mode. 3 TSK ERR 00000028, 0000003c
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 127 of 206 TASK Description Bit WD_TCP_IP_TASK This task implements the TCP-IP protocol stack. 4 WD_TIMER_TICK_TASK This task generates the clock for the TCP-IP task. 5 WD_STV0362_TASK This task gathers information from both the HP and LP tuners and configures them. 6 WD_ARK6AL_TASK This task gathers information from:  Get ADC value  Get Amplifier Voltage and current measure  Calculate FWD power level  Output AGC  Calculate Reflex power  Get temperature  Get opto & relay status  Disable alim status 7  The default tasks mask at the board startup is set to 0x0000007D (please note that the up-converter task is  initially  skipped).  Once  the  presence  of  the  up-converter  is  assured,  the  up-converter  task  bit  is automatically  enabled  and  the  mask  is  set  to  0x0000007F.  Tasks  execution  is  stopped  during  de-fragmentation operations and FPGA boots.  5.14.3 System Error Event  For  critical  and  fatal  errors,  the  system  calls  the  system  error  function  and  the  SYS_ERR  event  is reported. The error codes are described below:  0x00: Out of memory. Memory pool size is too small.  0x01:  Invalid  memory  block  release.  Buffer  data  has  been  written  out  of  boundaries  of  the allocated memory block.  0x02: Link pointer corrupted. Buffer data has been written out of boundaries of the allocated memory block.  0x03: No free UDP Sockets. The system has run out of UDP Sockets.  0x04: No free TCP Sockets. The system has run out of TCP Sockets.  0x05: TCP socket is in an undefined state. System memory has been accidentally overwritten.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 128 of 206 5.14.4 System Initialization Event  At every system initialization the event System Init is generated. This  event  is  followed  by  25  bytes  specifying  type  and  specific  code  of  errors  occurred  during  system initialization. Each byte refers to an error as described in the following table: Table 26.  Init system event specific data Description Errors code Byte FS_ERR File System error.  0x00: File System ok.  0x01: FS partition error (invalid FS).  1° INFO_ERR *.cfg file error.  0x00: File ok.  0x01: File not found or File open error.  0x02…0x03: Invalid file (syntax errors). 2° DEF_ERR *.def file error.  0x00: File ok.  0x01: File open error.  0x02: File not found. 3° LCD_ERR LCD error.  0x00: LCD ok.  0x01: LCD not found. 4° PLL_960M_ERR 960 MHz PLL error.  0x00: PLL locked.  0x01: PLL not locked 5° BOOT_ERR FPGA boot error.  0x00: FPGA boot ok.  0x01: FPGA NILL boot error  0x02: FPGA file version error  0x03: FPGA code error. 6° LOAD_CFG_ERR *.sav file error.  0x00: File ok.  0x01: File open error.   0x02…0x05: Invalid file (syntax errors). 7° SNMP_ERR SNMP file error.  0x00: SNMP file ok.  0x01: SNMP file not found.  0x02: File open error.  0x03: UDP socket initialization error.  0x04: Port 161 open error. 8°
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 129 of 206 Description Errors code Byte CALIB_ERR *.pwr file error.  0x00: File ok.  0x01: Current AGC mode file not found.  0x02: Current AGC mode file open error.  0x03…0x12: Invalid current AGC mode file (syntax error).  0x20: Other AGC mode file not found  0x21: Other AGC mode file open error.  0x22…0x26: Invalid other AGC mode file (syntax error). Please note that the AGC mode may be analog or digital. Actual AGC mode is displayed in Java output window. 9° PREC_ERR  0x00: File ok. 10°  LINEAR_ERR  0x00: File ok.  0x01: File not found.  0x02: File open error.  0x03…0x06: Invalid file (syntax errors). 11° DOWNCV_ERR Downconverter PLL not locked error.  0x00: PLL locked.  0x01: PLL not locked  0x10: PLL disabled. 12° UPCV_ERR Upconverter error.  0x00: Upconverter ready. 13° CH_FILT_ERR *.chf7 or *.chf8 file error.  0x00: File ok.  0x01: File not found.  0x02: File open error.  0x03…0x06: Invalid file (syntax errors). Please note that checked file is the one which refers to the current signal bandwidth: *.chf7 refers to VHF bandwidth, *.chf8 refers to UHF bandwidth. 14°
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 130 of 206 Description Errors code Byte CH_DEF_ERR *.cdef file error.  0x00: File ok.  0x01: File not found.  0x02: File open error.  0x03: syntax error or lack of input number of channels.  0x13: syntax error or lack of output number of channels.  0x04: input channels memory allocation error.  0x14: output channels memory allocation error.  0x05: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in *.cdef file is disabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of input channels definition lines.  0x15: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in *.cdef file is disabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of output channels definition lines.  0x06: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in *.cdef file is enabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of input channels definition lines.  0x16: when the automatic indexing of channels listed in *.cdef file is enabled, it notifies syntax errors or lack of output channels definition lines. 15°
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 131 of 206 5.15 System menu  Figure 44. Menu bar   The menu bar allows the access to three menus:  File:  allows  to  import/export  the  configuration  file,  to  load  and  save  the  board  configuration and to download the screenshots of the Java GUI;  View: allows to navigate windows and to configure java update time and events alert massages;  Help: allows to access information such as board name, board IP address, serial numbers of HW components, File System content, an abstract of the User Manual and system characteristics.  5.15.1 File Menu Figure 45. File menu   The File menu is structured as follows:  Save: saves the current device configuration.  Load: loads the last saved configuration.  Export Config: exports last saved configuration of the device (the *.sav file).  Import Config: imports a new configuration file (the *.sav file).  Capture screenshots: downloads a screenshot for each one of the selected windows.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 132 of 206 5.15.2 View Menu  Figure 46. View menu   The View menu allows accessing the following windows:  Home Page  Input  Front-End  ISDB-T Processing  ITU Processing  DVB-T Processing  ATSC Processing  DVB-T2 Processing  Linear Precorrection  AM/PM Precorrection  Adaptive Linear Precorrection  Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection  Output  Network.  GPS.  Alarms  Events: Events window.  Options...: Options window.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 133 of 206 5.15.2.1 Options window  The Options window has two tabs:  Time: Time Read Interval [s];  Alerts: the selection of events to display. Click on the Save button to save Java options; a new *.properties file will be created. The  device  is  not  loaded  with  a  factory  default  *.properties  file,  but  it  is  created  and  then  stored  in System File once properties are saved for the first time. 5.15.2.1.1 Time Figure 47. Time window    This  control  allows  changing  the  device-to-management  PC  java  update  time.  The  default  value  is  2 seconds. Click on Close button to quit this window. 5.15.2.1.2 Alerts Figure 48. Alerts window    Alerts tab allows selecting which types of events will be notified through Alert boxes. Alerts appear on the right side of the monitor.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 134 of 206 The selection is performed among the following types of event:  Commands (blue boxes): o Gigabit Ethernet commands; o RS232 commands; o SNMP commands; o LCD Display commands.  Alarms (red boxes);  Events (green messages): o Board events.  Typing error (yellow messages): o Typed setting is incorrect.  Click on hide button to close alerts popup windows. Figure 49. Alert message  Alerts can be disabled through the hide button located on the right side of the box. The hide button, once clicked, disables all boxes belonging to the same class.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 135 of 206 5.15.3 Help Menu  Figure 50. Help menu   The Help menu allows to select one of the following options:  Contents: Help with an abstract of the User Manual.  About: shows the board name and the management IP address. It also provides uC, FPGA, Java and GPS software versions. Click on OK button to close the window. Figure 51. About window
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 136 of 206  Info:  shows  serial  numbers  of  HW  components,  File  System  content  and  the  managed  system characteristics. Click on OK button to close Info window. Figure 52. Info window: Serial Numbers  Figure 53. Info window: Server File System Content  Figure 54. Info window: Client System Parameters
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 137 of 206 5.16 Download Software Standalone  The  Download  Software  Standalone  button  allows  the  downloading  of  standalone  Java  application (executable *.jar file) based on java applet. If your browser is Internet Explorer, it may block the site from downloading files to your computer. If you want to enable the file downloading, follow the instructions listed below:  Open Internet Explorer;  Click on the Tools button and then click on Internet Options;  Click on the Security tab and then click on Custom level button;  To turn off the Information bar for file downloads, scroll to the Downloads section of the list, and then, under Automatic prompting for file downloads, click on Enable;  Click on OK, click Yes in order to confirm that you want to make the change, and then click OK again. Figure 55. Download Software Standalone
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 138 of 206 6 Local User Interface  The following paragraphs describe the local user interface for ARK6 T2. This user interface is composed of LCD Display, seven buttons and two status LEDs. Here below is depicted the ARK6 Front Panel.                  STAND-BY: push  this button (lie  in  wait for two  seconds)  to  put  the equipment  on STAND-BY mode. The orange led lights up and the written  STAND-BY MODE appears on the display. The remote Stand-by mode is enforceable only if on JAVA interface this feature is enabled.  ON: push this button (lie in wait for two seconds) to turn on the equipment. The green led lights up and the MAIN MENU is displayed.  OK: push this button to select or to confirm the sub-menu or the value respectively. Touching the screen with a finger the green led lights up.  ESC: push this button to quit a submenu and to return to the previous one. Touching the screen with a finger the green led lights up.  ALARM: when an alarm occurs the RED LED lights up.  UP  ARROW:  push  this  button  to  scroll  up  menus  or  to  increase  a  value.  Touching  the  screen with a finger the green led lights up.  DOWN  ARROW:  push this button  to scroll down menus  or  to  decrease a  value.  Touching  the screen with a finger the green led lights up.  LEFT ARROW: push this button to move within a string. Touching the screen with a finger the green led lights up.  RIGHT ARROW: push this button to move within a string. Touching the screen with a finger the green led lights up. OK  ALARM     ESCAPE     ON   STANB-BY     LEFT ARROW UP ARROW RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 139 of 206 6.1 Boot and Welcome Message  Turning on the equipment, the display shows the progress bar as follow:  Screen ServiceARK -  DVB-T2System InitInit : [                     ]      Wait Screen ServiceARK -  DVB-T2Boot FPGAInit : [                     ]      Wait Screen ServiceARK -  DVB-T2Start systemInit : [                     ]      Wait Screen ServiceARK -  DVB-T2Start systemInit : [                     ]    Ready  When the boot is over, the device is ready.  Screen ServiceARK -  DVB-T2Start systemInit : [                     ]    Ready Screen ServiceARK -  DVB-T2IP  10.77.98.44                                 Ready  Press ESC to enter the main menu, otherwise after one minute waiting the idle status message appears.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 140 of 206 6.2 Idle Menu  ARK -  DVB-T2In:ASI1Out     17.1dBm      CH:22UTC:  14:11        10/03/11  This menu appears after one minute waiting from the last touch. Information contained in the Idle Menu are described in next table. Table 27.  Local User Interface: Idle Menu Information Description ARK – DVB-T2 (ATSC) Device description In Input signal source Out Output power and channel IP Management IP address (GBE 1) UTC UTC time and date  Press ESC to enter the MAIN MENU.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 141 of 206 6.3 Main Menu         Events       Network setup       Time & Date setup     /    OK: SET/  This menu shows six SUBMENUs. It is possible to view them sliding the menu up and down, with the UP or DOWN ARROWS, and to select one of them by pushing OK button. Submenus contained in the Main Menu are described in next table. Table 28.  Local User Interface: submenus descriptions Submenu Description Network setup Enter this submenu to set:  GbE1 Board IP address  GbE1 Gateway address  GbE1 Netmask  GbE2 IP address  GbE2 Gateway address  GbE2 Netmask Settings in this submenu do not need to be saved; they will be loaded at next device restart. Time & Date setup Enter this submenu to set:  Time  Date Settings in this submenu do not need to be saved in order to be loaded at next device restart. System Status Enter this submenu to monitor system status and installer version the device is loaded with. Alarms Alarms, detected and associated to the local interface by the relative mask, are listed in this submenu. Reset system Enter this submenu to reset the device. Events Enter this submenu to manage and monitor the events list.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 142 of 206 6.4 LCD Alarms  Through the LCD Alarms mask it is possible to select which alarm has to be notified on LCD display. When an alarm condition occurs the alarm button  is lighted and an alarm message is displayed in the Alarms submenu. The  following  table  lists  alarms  to  alarm  messages  association  (refer  to  Alarms  paragraph  for  further information about alarms and their masks). Table 29.  Alarms descriptions list Alarm Alarm Message Temperature Absolute High Temp. High Temperature Alarm (-3dB) Temp. High (-3dB) Temperature Warning Temp.High Warning Fans Speed Low Fans Speed Low Alim Dialog Err Alim Dialog Err FE Dialog Err FE Dialog Err Meas Dialog Err Meas Dialog Err GPS Dialog Err GPS Dialog Err GPS Not Locked GPS Not Locked 120MHz Not Locked 120M Not Locked 960MHz Not Locked 960M Not Locked Input PLL Not Locked In PLL Not Locked Output PLL Not Locked Out PLL Not Locked 10MHz Not Locked 10M Not Locked 1PPS Not Locked 1PPS Not Locked FPGA Boot Error FPGA Boot Err Forward Power High FWD Power High Forward Power Low Warning FWD Low Warning Forward Power Low Alarm FWD Pwr Low Reflex Power High Reflex Power High File System Error FS Err Bad File In File System File Error
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 143 of 206 Alarm Alarm Message PS Voltage Out Of Range PS1V Out Of Range PS Current Out Of Range PS1I Out Of Range CPU Fan Error CPU Fan Error Test Mode Test Mode FE S2 Not Locked FE S2 not locked FE S2 S/N Low FE S2 SNR Low FE S2 BER High FE S2 BER high FE S2 Global Alarm  [ATSC] No Input Input not valid [ATSC] Input Overflow Input overflow [ATSC] MH Err MH Error [ATSC] MEAS Demodulator Not Locked Meas Not Locked [ATSC] MEAS SNR Low Meas SNR Low [ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked FE Not Locked [ATSC] FE SNR Low FE SNR Low
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 144 of 206 7 SNMP – Simple Network Management Protocol  The SNMP model assumes the existence of managers and agents. A manager is a software module in a management system responsible for managing the device. An agent is a software module in a managed device responsible for  maintaining local management  information and delivering that information to  a manager via SNMP. A management information exchange can be initiated by the manager (via polling) or by the agent (via trap). Interaction  between  a  user  of  board  management  and  the  board  management  software  takes  place across a user interface. Such an interface is needed to provide users with a monitoring and controlling tool in order to allow some parameters to be viewed or set locally. The operations that are supported in SNMP network management are  the alteration and inspection of variables. Specifically, three general-purpose operations may be performed on scalar objects:  Get: a management station retrieves a scalar object value from a managed station.  Set: a management station updates a scalar object value in a managed station.  Trap: a managed station sends an unsolicited scalar object value to a management station. Management information accessible via SNMP is maintained in a management information base (MIB) at each manager and agent node. On  manager side,  ARK6  management  system has  been  tested  with MG-SOFT  as MIB  Browser;  besides compatibility with any other MIB browser is assured. The following MIB libraries are required for the SNMP management of the equipment:  screenservice.mib  screen-common-types.mib  ark6-t2.mib  clk-ref.mib  clock.mib  gps.mib  hw-monitor.mib  input.mib  measure.mib  s2-fe.mib2  ark6.mib  network.mib  output.mib  screen-common.mib  t2-fe.mib  t2-meas.mib  t2-modulation.mib  ts-over-ip.mib  itu-modulation.mib2  t-fe.mib2  t-meas.mib2  t-modulation.mib2  ark6-atsc.mib2  ark6-isdbt.mib2  ark6-itu.mib2  ark6-t.mib2  atsc-fe.mib2  atsc-meas.mib2  atsc-modulation.mib2  isdbt-fe.mib2  isdbt-meas.mib2  isdbt-modulation.mib2  Compatibility tested and assured with SNMP version 1 and 2.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 145 of 206 7.1 SNMP Protocol Preferences  Go to SNMP Protocol Preferences. The following parameters should be set in order to correctly configure the SNMP Manager:  SNMP protocol version: SNMPv1/SNMPv2; Read Community: the same of the one set in the Get field of Java interface, community section; Set Community: the same of the one set in the Set field of Java interface, community section; Timeout [s]: user defined; Retransmits: user defined; Port number: 161. Next figure illustrates how to configure SNMP Protocol Preferences using MG_SOFT MIB Browser as an example. Figure 56. SNMP Protocol Preferences
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 146 of 206 7.2 Monitoring  All status and setup information can be queried via SNMP. To get the setup and status information you need a management system (or a special MIB browser). Next  figure,  referring  to  MG-SOFT  MIB  Browser  as  an  example,  is  a  broad  view  of  the  ARK6  tree structure. Figure 57. ARK6 Tree Structure
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 147 of 206 The SSBT MIBs are:  ssbt-common-types: the MIB module housing SSBT Textual Conventions.  ssbtAtscModulation:  the MIB module to  manage the  equipment configuration when operated in ATSC mode.  ssbtClock: the MIB module for clock management.  ssbtArk6Atsc: the specific ARK6-ATSC MIB.  ssbtGps: the MIB module to monitor the collection of live data from the GPS receiver.  ssbtHwMonitor: The MIB module for HW monitor.  ssbtInput: the MIB module to monitor and manage inputs.  ssbtIsdbtModulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated in ISDB-T mode.  ssbtItuModulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated in ITU mode.  ssbtOutput: the MIB module to monitor and manage outputs.  ssbtTsOverIP: the MIB module to manage input and output GbE channels.  ssbtT2Modulation: the MIB module to manage the equipment configuration when operated in DVB-T2 mode.  ssbtArk6T2: the specific ARK6-T2 MIB.  ssbtMeasure: the MIB module to manage and monitor ARK6 Measure board.  ssbtCommon: the MIB module housing SSBT common objects.  ssbtClkRef: the MIB module to set the frequency reference.  ssbtT2FrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from DVB-T2 Front-End.  ssbtT2Meas: the MIB module to manage and monitor T2 information from Measure board.  ssbtNetwork: the MIB module for network monitoring.  ssbtArk6T: the specific ARK6-T MIB.  ssbtTFrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from DVB-T Front-End.  ssbtTMeas: the MIB module to manage and monitor DVB-T information from Measure board.  ssbtTModulation:  the  MIB module to manage  the  equipment  configuration  when  operated  in DVB-T mode.  ssbtArk6: the MIB module for the objects common to all ARK6 modes.  ssbtS2FrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from DVB-S/S2 Front-End.  ssbtArk6Isdbt: the specific ARK6-ISDBT MIB.  ssbtIsdbtFrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from ISDB-T Front-End.  ssbtIsdbtMeas:  the  MIB  module  to  manage  and  monitor  ISDB-T  information  from  Measure board.  ssbtAtscMeas: the MIB module to manage and monitor ATSC information from Measure board.  ssbtArk6Itu: the specific ARK6-ITU MIB.  ssbtAtscFrontEnd: the MIB module to manage and monitor information from ATSC Front-End.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 148 of 206 Table 30.  ARK6 SNMP Tree Structure OID Name R/W Description 1 iso   1.3 org   1.3.6 dod   1.3.6.1 internet   1.3.6.1.2 mgmt   1.3.6.1.2.1 mib-2   1.3.6.1.2.1.1 system   1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1 sysDescr R A textual description of the entity. This value includes the full name and version identification of the system" 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2 sysObjectID R  1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 sysUpTimeInstance R  1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4 sysContact R  1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5 sysName R Identification name of the equipment managed 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6 sysLocation R  1.3.6.1.2.1.1.7 sysServices R  1.3.6.1.4 private   1.3.6.1.4.1 enterprise   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678 ssbt   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302 ssbtAtscModulation   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1 amMobileHandheld   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1.1 ammhPid RW ATSC M/H mode PID setting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1.2 ammhEnable RW Enables ATSC M/H mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.302.1.3 ammhFrameStatus R ATSC M/H frame alarm  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303 ssbtClock   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.1 reference   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.1.1 refClock RW Frequency reference selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2 gps   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.1 satellites   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.1.1 satVisible R Number of visible satellites. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.1.2 satTracked R Number of locked satellite. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.2 position   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.2.1 positionLatitude R Latitude position [°] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.2.2 positionLongitude R Longitude position [°] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.3 utc
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 149 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.3.1 utcDate R UTC date and time as specified in SNMPv2-TC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.4 gpsLockStatus   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.2.4.1 glsGps R GPS lock status derived from live data provided by the GPS receiver 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3 ocxo   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.1 fineFreqAdjust RW Enables the Holdover mechanism 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.2 dataToFlash R Sets the timeout of the Holdover in hour 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3 ocxoLockStatus   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3.1 olsGps R OCXO locked to the external GPS reference 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3.2 ols10Mhz R OCXO locked to the external 10 MHz reference 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.3.3.3 ols1Pps R OCXO locked to the external 1PPS reference 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4 holdover   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.1 hEnable RW Enables the Holdover mechanism 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.2 hTimeout RW Sets the timeout of the Holdover in hour 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.3 hStatus R The status of the Holdover mechanism 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.303.4.4 hTmoStatus R The countdown of the Holdover timeout expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306 ssbtHwMonitor   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.1 reflexPower R Reflex power [dBm x 10] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.2 amplifierStatus R Amplifier status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3 powerSupplies   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.1 psNumber R The number of power supplies present on this system 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2 psTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1 psEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.1 psIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.2 psDescr R Power supply description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.3 psVMeasUnit R Voltage unit of measurement 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.4 psVoltage R Voltage indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.5 psCMeasUnit R Current unit of measurement 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.2.1.6 psCurrent R Current indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.3.3 psRestart W Restarts the amplifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5 fans   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.1 fansNumber R The number of fans present on this system 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2 fansTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1 fansEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.1 fansIndex R
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 150 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.2 fansDescr R Fan description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.3 fansMeasUnit R Fan speed unit of measurement 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.5.2.1.4 fansSpeed R Fan speed 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6 temperatures   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.1 tempNumber R The number of temperature sensors present on this system 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2 tempTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1 tempEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.1 tempIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.2 tempDescr R Temperature indicator description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.3 tempMeasUnit R Temperature unit of measurement 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.6.2.1.4 tempLevel R Temperature indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7 relays   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.1 rlNumber R The number of relays present on this system 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2 rlTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1 rlEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1.1 rlIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1.2 rlDescr R Relay description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.7.2.1.3 rlStatus R Relay status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8 optocouplers   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.1 optNumber R The number of optocouplers present on this system 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2 optTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1 optEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1.1 optIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1.2 optDescr R Optocoupler description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.8.2.1.3 optStatus R Optocoupler status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.9 cpuFan   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.9.1 cfNoFan R CPU Fan missing alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.306.9.2 cfFanFault R CPU ventilation blocked alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307 ssbtInput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1 inputSettings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1 isT2InputManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1.1 ist2imInputSel RW Input selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1.2 ist2imRfChannel RW Input channel selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.1.3 ist2imRfFreqOff RW Input frequency offset expressed in Hz (1Hz steps, from -200 kHz to 200 kHz)
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 151 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2 isT2InputAutoswitch   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.1 ist2iaEnable RW Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.2 ist2iaState R Current state of the finite-state machine 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.3 ist2iaActualInput R Shows the currently used input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.4 ist2iaPrimaryToSecondaryCounter R Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.5 ist2iaSecondaryToSecondaryCounter R Secondary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.2.6 ist2iaSecondaryToPrimaryCounter R Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3 isTInputManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1 istimInputSel   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.1 istimisHpInput1 RW High Priority input 1 selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.2 istimisLpInput1 RW Low Priority input 1 selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.3 istimisHpInput2 RW High Priority input 2 selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.1.4 istimisLpInput2 RW Low Priority input 2 selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.2 istimRfChannel RW Input channel selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.3.3 istimRfFreqOff RW Input frequency offset +/- 200 kHz (1Hz step) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4 isTSeamlessSwitch   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1 istssHpInput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.1 istsshiForceInput RW Forces the use of the selected input as High Priority input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.2 istsshiPriorityInput RW Sets the priority input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.3 istsshiUsedInput R Shows the currently used input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.1.4 istsshiSwitchState R Shows the status of the Seamless Switch 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2 istssLpInput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.1 istsslpForceInput RW Forces the use of the selected input as Low Priority input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.2 istsslpPriorityInput RW Sets the priority input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.3 istsslpUsedInput R Shows the currently used input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.2.4 istsslpSwitchState R Shows the status of the Seamless Switch 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3 istssSeamlessAlarms   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.1 istsssaInputNumber R The number of inputs depending on the Hierarchical Mode and on the HP/LP Force Input selectors 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2 istsssaTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1 istsssaEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.1 istsssaIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.2 istsssaInputDescr R Input description
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 152 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.3 istsssaPatCrcEn RW Enables the PAT CRC alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.4 istsssaMipCrcEn RW Enables the MIP CRC alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.5 istsssaSyncErrEn RW Enables the Sync alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.6 istsssaPktJitterEn RW Enables the Packet Jitter alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.7 istsssaTransportErrEn RW Enables the Transport Error alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.8 istsssaAsiWordErrEn RW Enables the ASI Word Error alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.9 istsssaMipPriorityErrEn RW Enables the MIP Priority alarm bit in the Seamless Alarm Mask 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.10 istsssaNetworkDelay R Shows the Network Delay of the specific entry 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.11 istsssaWatchdogErr R Input Watchdog alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.12 istsssaLateMipErr R Late MIP alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.13 istsssaNotValidErr R Invalid Input alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.14 istsssaPatCrcErr R PAT CRC alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.15 istsssaMipCrcErr R MIP CRC alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.16 istsssaSyncErr R Transport Stream Sync Error alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.17 istsssaPktJitterErr R Packet Jitter alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.18 istsssaTransportErr R Transport Error alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.19 istsssaAsiWordErr R ASI Word Error alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.20 istsssaNetworkDelayErr R Network Delay alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.4.3.2.1.21 istsssaMipPriorityErr R MIP Priority alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5 isIInputManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5.1 isiimInputSel RW Input selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5.2 isiimRfChannel RW Input channel selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.5.3 isiimRfFreqOff RW Input frequency offset expressed in Hz (1Hz steps, from -200 kHz to 200 kHz) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6 isAInputManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6.1 isaimInputSel RW Input selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6.2 isaimRfChannel RW Input channel selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.6.3 isaimRfFreqOff RW Input frequency offset +/- 200 kHz (1Hz step) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7 isAInputAutoswitch   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.1 isaiaEnable RW Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.2 isaiaState R Current state of the finite-state machine
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 153 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.3 isaiaActualInput R Shows the currently used input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.4 isaiaPrimaryToSecondaryCounter R Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.5 isaiaSecondaryToSecondaryCounter R Secondary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.7.6 isaiaSecondaryToPrimaryCounter R Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.8 isItuInputManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.8.1 isituimInputSel RW Input selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.8.2 isituimSdiAudioSel RW SDI audio selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9 isItuInputAutoswitch   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.1 isituiaEnable RW Enables the use of Input Autoswitch finite-state machine 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.2 isituiaState R Current state of the finite-state machine 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.3 isituiaActualInput R Shows the currently used input 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.4 isituiaPrimaryToSecondaryCounter R Primary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.5 isituiaSecondaryToSecondaryCounter R Secondary to secondary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.1.9.6 isituiaSecondaryToPrimaryCounter R Secondary to primary input switch countdown expressed in seconds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2 inputStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.1 isNumber R Number of inputs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2 isTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1 isEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.1 isIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.2 isDescr R Input descriptor 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.3 isType R Input type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.4 isWordRate R Input word rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.5 isBitRate R Iinput bitrate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.6 isFiltered R Filtered bitrate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.7 isOverflow R Overflow 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.8 isLock R Lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.9 isPckFormat R Packet format 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.10 isCarrierDetect R Carrier detect indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.11 isErrors R Wrong bytes received 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.2.1.12 isBypassEnable RW Cable equalizer bypass enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3 sdi
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 154 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.1 sdiNumber R Number of SDI inputs. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2 sdiTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1 sdiEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.1 sdiIndex R Index of the specific entry 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.2 sdiDescr R SDI input description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.3 sdiLock R SDI lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.4 sdiCarrierDetectAlarm R SDI carrier detect alarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.5 sdiCh12Present R SDI audio channels 1-2 are present 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.6 sdiCh1Level R SDI audio channel 1 level expressed in dBFS (-128 stands for muted or no signal) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.7 sdiCh2Level R SDI audio channel 2 level expressed in dBFS (-128 stands for muted or no signal) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.8 sdiCh34Present R SDI audio channels 3-4 are present 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.9 sdiCh3Level R SDI audio channel 3 level expressed in dBFS (-128 stands for muted or no signal) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.10 sdiCh4Level R SDI audio channel 4 level expressed in dBFS (-128 stands for muted or no signal) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.11 sdiStandard R SDI standard 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.3.2.1.12 sdiBypassEnable RW Cable equalizer bypass enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4 cvbs   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.1 cvbsNumber R Number of CVBS inputs. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2 cvbsTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1 cvbsEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.1 cvbsIndex R Index of the specific entry 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.2 cvbsDescr R Input description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.3 cvbsLock R Input lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.4 cvbsColorSub R Color subcarrier lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.5 cvbsVerticalLock R Vertical lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.6 cvbsHorizontalLock R Horizontal lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.7 cvbsStandard R CVBS input standard 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.8 cvbsFrameRate R Frame rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.2.4.2.1.9 cvbsADPalCompensation RW Enables the A/D PAL Compensation 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3 t2FrontEnd   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1 t2feStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.1 t2fesRxLevel R Input RX level   127: over input   -128: low power   -63...62: power expressed in dB 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.2 t2fesCarrierOffset R Input carrier offset
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 155 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.3 t2fesIfAgc R Input IF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.4 t2fesRfAgc R Input RF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.5 t2fesTsLock R Demodulated TS Lock 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.6 t2fesSyncStat R Sync statistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.7 t2fesMer R Input MER [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.8 t2fesSnr R Input SNR [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.9 t2fesPreLdpcBer R Input Pre LDPC BER  [1e7] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.10 t2fesPostBchFer R Input Post BCH FER  [1e6] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.11 t2fesPreBchBer R Input Pre BCH BER  [1e9] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.12 t2fesDemodPpm R Demodulated PPM  [ppmx1e2] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.13 t2fesSignalQuality R Signal quality [%] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.14 t2fesBitrate R Expected bitrate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.1.15 t2fesLdpcIter R LDPC iterations per minute 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2 t2feL1Pre   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.1 t2feL1PreType R Input stream type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.2 t2feL1PreBwt R BWT extension indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.3 t2feL1PreS1 R S1 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.4 t2feL1PreS2 R S2 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.5 t2feL1PreFftSize R FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.6 t2feL1PreMixed R Mixed indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.7 t2feL1PreL1Repeat R L1 repeat enable flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.8 t2feL1PreGuardInterval R Guard Interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.9 t2feL1PrePapr R PAPR 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.10 t2feL1PreL1Mod R L1 modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.11 t2feL1PreL1CodeRate R L1 code rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.12 t2feL1PreL1Fec R L1 FEC Type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.13 t2feL1PreL1PostSize R L1 Post Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.14 t2feL1PreL1PostInfoSize R L1 Post Info Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.15 t2feL1PrePilotPattern R Pilot Pattern 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.16 t2feL1PreTxIdAvailability R TX Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.17 t2feL1PreCellId R Cell Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.18 t2feL1PreT2NetworkId R T2 Network Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.19 t2feL1PreT2SystemId R T2 System Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.20 t2feL1PreNumT2Frames R Number of T2 frames 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.21 t2feL1PreNumDataSymb R Number of data symbols 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.22 t2feL1PreRegenFlag R Regeneration count indicator
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 156 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.23 t2feL1PreL1PostExt R L1 Post extension enabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.2.24 t2feL1PreRfIndex R The current RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3 t2feL1Post   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.1 t2feL1PostSubSliceNum R Number of sub-slices per frame 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.2 t2feL1PostFefType R The type of the associated FEF part 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.3 t2feL1PostFefLength R FEF length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.4 t2feL1PostFefInterval R FEF interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5 t2feL1PostAux   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.1 t2feL1PostAuxNum R Number of AUXs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2 t2feL1PostAuxTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1 t2feL1PostAuxEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1.1 t2feL1PostAuxIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1.2 t2feL1PostAuxStreamType R The type of the current auxiliary stream 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.5.2.1.3 t2feL1PostAuxPrivateConf R RFU 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6 t2feL1PostRf   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.1 t2feL1PostNumRf R The number of RF frequencies in use 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2 t2feL1PostRfTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1 t2feL1PostRfEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1.1 t2feL1PostRfIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1.2 t2feL1PostRfIdx R RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.6.2.1.3 t2feL1PostFrequency R Frequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7 t2feL1PostPlp   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.1 t2feL1PostPlpNum R Number of PLPs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2 t2feL1PostPlpTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1 t2feL1PostPlpEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.1 t2feL1PostPlpIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.2 t2feL1PostPlpId R PLP ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.3 t2feL1PostPlpType R PLP type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.4 t2feL1PostPlpPayloadType R PLP payload type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.5 t2feL1PostFfFlag R FF flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.6 t2feL1PostFirstRfIdx R First RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.7 t2feL1PostFirstFrameIdx R First frame index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.8 t2feL1PostGroupId R PLP group id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.9 t2feL1PostPlpCod R The code rate used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.10 t2feL1PostPlpMod R The modulation used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.11 t2feL1PostPlpRotation R DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 157 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.12 t2feL1PostPlpFec R The FEC type used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.13 t2feL1PostNumBlocksMax R Maximum number of PLP blocks 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.14 t2feL1PostFrameInterval R Frame interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.15 t2feL1PostTimeIntLength R Time interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.16 t2feL1PostTimeIntType R Time interleaving type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.17 t2feL1PostInbandA R In-band A flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.18 t2feL1PostInbandB R In-band B flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.19 t2feL1PostPlpMode R PLP mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.20 t2feL1PostStaticFlag R Static flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.3.3.7.2.1.21 t2feL1PostStaticPaddFlag R Static padding flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4 tFrontEnd   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1 tfeStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.1 tfesRxLevel R Input RX level   127: over input   -128: low power   -63...62: power expressed in dB 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.2 tfesCarrierOffset R Input carrier offset 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.3 tfesIfAgc R Input IF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.4 tfesRfAgc R Input RF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.5 tfesTsLock R Demodulated TS Lock 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.6 tfesSyncStat R Sync statistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.7 tfesMer R Input MER [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.8 tfesSnr R Input SNR [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.9 tfesPreVitBer R Input Pre Viterbi BER  [1e7] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.10 tfesPreRsBer R Input Pre RS BER  [1e7] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.11 tfesRsErrCount R Input RS errors count detected by the RS decoder over 1 second 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.12 tfesDemodPpm R Demodulated PPM  [ppmx1e2] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.13 tfesSignalQuality R Signal quality [%] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.1.14 tfesBitrate R Expected bitrate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2 tfeDemodParams   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.1 tfedpConstellation R Constellation for current modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.2 tfedpHierMode R Hierarchy information for current modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.3 tfedpHpCodeRate R High Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.4 tfedpLpCodeRate R Low Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.5 tfedpFft R FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.6 tfedpGuardInterval R Guard interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.4.2.7 tfedpCelllId R Cell identifier
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 158 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5 s2FrontEnd   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1 s2feSettngs   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.1 s2feFrequency RW Frequency [MHz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.2 s2feSymbolRate RW Symbol Rate [KBaud] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.3 s2fePolarization RW Polarization 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.4 s2feIsiA RW Input Stream Identifier A 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.5 s2feIsiB RW Input Stream Identifier B 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6 s2fePls   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.1 s2fepMode RW Mode selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.2 s2fepN0 RW PLS number 0 setting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.3 s2fepN1 RW PLS number 1 setting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.1.6.4 s2fepN2 RW PLS number 2 setting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2 s2feDemodParams   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.1 s2fedpRxLevel R Input RX  level [dBm] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.2 s2fedpLock R Transponder lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.3 s2fedpStandard R Input standard 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.4 s2fedpRxModCode R Modulation mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.5 s2fedpBand R Band 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.6 s2fedpMode R Mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.7 s2fedpSnr R S/N level [dB * 10] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.8 s2fedpPilots R Pilots 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.9 s2fedpRollOff R Roll off 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.10 s2fedpConstellation R Constellation 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.5.2.11 s2fedpBer R Bit Error Rate (* 10^7) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6 isdbtFrontEnd   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1 ifeStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.1 ifesRxLevel R Input RX level   127: over input   -128: low power   -63...62: power expressed in dB 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.2 ifesIfLevel R Input IF level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.3 ifesIfAgcDac R IF AGC output DAC value 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.4 ifesDemState R The state of the sequencer 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.5 ifesMode R Input mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.6 ifesGuardInterval R Input guard interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.7 ifesSTRFreqErr R Frequency error detected  by symbol timing recovery [Hz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.8 ifesCRFreqErr R Frequency error detected  by carrier recovery [kHz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.1.9 ifesCN R Estimated Carrier to Noise ratio (dB x 10)
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 159 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2 ifeLayerStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.1 ifelsNumber R The number of Layers 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2 ifelsTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1 ifelsEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.1 ifelsIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.2 ifelsDescr R Layer description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.3 ifelsMod R Modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.4 ifelsCodeRate R Code rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.5 ifelsTILength R Time Interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.6 ifelsSegNum R Number of segments 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.7 ifelsMer R MER [dB] (* 10) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.8 ifelsPreVitBer R Pre-Viterbi BER (* 10^9) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.9 ifelsPostVitBer R Post-Viterbi BER (* 10^9) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.6.2.2.1.10 ifelsPktErrRate R Packet Error Rate (* 10^9) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7 atscFrontEnd   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1 afeStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.1 afesFrequencyOffset R Input carrier offset 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.2 afesDemodStatus R VSB demodulation status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.3 afesEqStatus R Equalizer status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.4 afesDemLock R Demodulator lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.5 afesAgcLock R Digital AGC lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.6 afesFrameLock R Frame lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.7 afesCarrierFreqLoopLock R Carrier frequency loop lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.8 afesTimingFreqLoopLock R Timing frequency loop lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.9 afesSnr R Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.10 afesSer R Segment Error Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.307.7.1.11 afesBer R Bit Error Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308 ssbtIsdbtModulation   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1 imSettings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.1 imsIipStatus   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.1.1 imsisValid R Input IIP valid 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.1.2 imsisAlarm R Input IIP alarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.2 imsNetworkMode RW Transmitter network mode selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.3 imsEquipmentId RW Equipment ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.4 imsDefIip R Equipment ID found in IIP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.5 imsNetworkDelay R Network delay [100ns]
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 160 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.6 imsEWS   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.6.1 imsewsEnable RW Enables the local editing of the Emergency switch on control flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.6.2 imsewsSetting RW Sets the Emergency switch on control flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7 imsLayersMonitor   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.1 imslmNumber R The number of Layers 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2 imslmTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1 imslmEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.1 imslmIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.2 imslmDescr R Layer description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.3 imslmPktXFrame R Number of packets per frame 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.4 imslmOverflow R Overflow 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.1.7.2.1.5 imslmUnderflow R Underflow 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2 imIipParams   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.1 imipMode R IIP modulator mode. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.2 imipGuardInterval R IIP modulator guard interval. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.3 imipUsePartialReceptionFlag R IIP modulator use the Partial Reception Flag. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.4 imipMaxDelay R IIP maximum delay [100 ns]. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.5 imipSyncId R IIP modulator use the Synchronization ID. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.6 imipStaticDelay R IIP modulator use the Time Reference. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.7 imipTimeOffset R IIP time offset [100 ns]. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8 imipLayers   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.1 imiplNumber R The number of Layers 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2 imiplTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1 imiplEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.1 imiplIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.2 imiplDescr R Layer description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.3 imiplMod R Modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.4 imiplCodeRate R Code rate of inner code 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.5 imiplTILength R Time Interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.2.8.2.1.6 imiplSegNum R Number of segments 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3 imLocalParams   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.1 imlpMode RW Modulator mode. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.2 imlpGuardInterval RW Modulator guard interval. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.3 imlpUsePartialReceptionFlag RW Use the Partial Reception Flag. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.4 imlpUserDelay RW User delay [100 ns].
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 161 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5 imlpLayers   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.1 imlplNumber R The number of Layers 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2 imlplTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1 imlplEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.1 imlplIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.2 imlplDescr RW Layer description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.3 imlplMod RW Modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.4 imlplCodeRate RW Code rate of inner code 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.5 imlplTILength RW Time Interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.3.5.2.1.6 imlplSegNum RW Number of segments 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4 imCurrentParams   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.1 imcpMode R Current modulator mode. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.2 imcpGuardInterval R Current modulator guard interval. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.3 imcpUsePartialReceptionFlag R Use the Partial Reception Flag. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.4 imcpSystemDelay R Current system delay [100 ns]. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5 imcpLayers   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.1 imcplNumber R The number of Layers 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2 imcplTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1 imcplEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.1 imcplIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.2 imcplDescr R Layer description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.3 imcplMod R Modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.4 imcplCodeRate R Code rate of inner code 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.5 imcplTILength R Time Interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.308.4.5.2.1.6 imcplSegNum R Number of segments 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309 ssbtItuModulation   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1 itumVideoSettings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1.1 itumvsWhitelevel RW White level [%]  (range 10 to 22) = [(x*0.05) + 10]  (x: range 0 to 240) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1.2 itumvsSynchAmplitude RW Synch Amplitude [%] (range: 22 to 27,5) = [(x*0.05) + 20]  (x: range 40 to 150) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.1.3 itumvsPedesLevel RW Pedes level [%] (range: 0 to 7) = (x*0.05) (x: range 0 to 140) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2 itumAudioSettings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.1 itumasDeviation RW Audio deviation level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.2 itumasSoundSystem RW Sound System selector
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 162 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.3 itumasCarrierLevel1 RW Carrier Level 1 [dB] (range: -7 to -22) = [-1* (x/10)] (range 70 to 220) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.4 itumasCarrierLevel2 RW Carrier Level 2 [dB] (range: -7 to -22) = [-1* (x/10)] (range 70 to 220) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.5 itumasEmphasis R Emphasis monitor 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.2.6 itumasType RW Selects the audio type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.3 itumGroupDelay   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.309.3.1 itumgdCurveSelector RW Mode selector for group delay filter 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310 ssbtOutput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1 outputSettings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1 osOutputManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.3 osomOutPower RW Output power 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4 osomRflManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.1 osomrmNumberAttempts RW Number of attempts to restore the system after a Reflex Power warning 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.2 osomrmStatus R Reflex Power status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.3 osomrmRflHigh R Shows if the Reflex Power High goes over the alarm threshold 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.4 osomrmCurrNumAttempt R Shows the current number of attemp to restore the system after a Reflex Power warning 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.5 osomrmAttemptTimeout R Shows the coutdown expressed in seconds between two attemps 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.6 osomrmReset W Resets the output amplifier stage once the device is in Reflex Power Alarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.4.7 osomrmResetTimeout R Shows the coutdown expressed in seconds to come back from Warning to Ok state 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.5 osomT2Output   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.5.1 osomt2oRfChannel RW Output channel 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.5.2 osomt2RfFreqOff RW Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz up to 200 kHz) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.6 osomTOutput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.6.1 osomtoRfChannel RW Output channel 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.6.2 osomtoRfFreqOff RW Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz up to 200 kHz) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.7 osomIOutput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.7.1 osomioRfChannel RW Output channel
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 163 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.7.2 osomioRfFreqOff RW Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz up to 200 kHz) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.8 osomAOutput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.8.1 osomaoRfChannel RW Output channel 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.8.2 osomaoRfFreqOff RW Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (1Hz steps, from -200 kHz to 200 kHz) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9 osomItuOutput   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9.1 osomituoRfChannel RW Output channel 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9.2 osomituoRfFreqOff RW Output frequency offset expressed in Hz (from -200 kHz up to 200 kHz) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.1.9.3 osomituoOutPower RW Output power 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.2 osT2TsProcessing   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.2.1 ost2tpDelNullPck RW Delete null packets enable   0: disabled   1: enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.3 osT2TsMonitoring   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.3.1 ost2tmAsiOut1Sel RW The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.3.2 ost2tmAsiOut2Sel RW The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.4 osTTsProcessing   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.4.1 osttpDelNullPck RW Delete null packets enable   0: disabled   1: enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.5 osTTsMonitoring   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.5.1 osttmAsiOut1Sel RW The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.5.2 osttmAsiOut2Sel RW The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.6 osITsProcessing   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.6.1 ositpDelNullPck RW Delete null packets enable   0: disabled   1: enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.7 osITsMonitoring   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.7.1 ositmAsiOut1Sel RW The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.7.2 ositmAsiOut2Sel RW The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.8 osATsProcessing   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.8.1 osatpDelNullPck RW Delete null packets enable   0: disabled   1: enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.9 osATsMonitoring   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.9.1 osatmAsiOut1Sel RW The input to ASI OUT HP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.1.9.2 osatmAsiOut2Sel RW The input to ASI OUT LP output bypass selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.2 rf   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.2.1 rfEnable RW RF output enable   0: disabled   1: enabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.2.2 rfStatus R RF output status   0: off   1: on 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3 testSignals   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.1 tsNumber R Number of available test signals. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2 tsTable NA
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 164 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1 tsEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1.1 tsIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1.2 tsDescr R Test signal description. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.2.1.3 tsEnable RW Test signal enable   0: disabled   1: enabled. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3 tsItu   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.1 video   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.1.1 videoTestSel RW Video test signal selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2 audio   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.1 audioToneEnable RW Enables the audio test tones 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.2 audioToneRight RW Right tone frequency (range:0  to127)  [unit x 100Hz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.3 audioToneLeft RW Left tone frequency (range:0  to127)  [unit x 100Hz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.2.4 audioMuteEnable RW Enables the audio muting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3 its   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.1 itsEnable RW Enables ITS test signal insertion 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.2 its0 RW ITS number 0 position 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.3 its1 RW ITS number 1 position 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.4 its2 RW ITS number 2 position 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.5 its3 RW ITS number 3 position 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.3.3.3.6 its4 RW ITS number 4 position 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4 outputMonitor   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4.1 omFwdPower R Forward power [dBm x 10] indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4.2 omAgcMode R AGC mode status   0: analog   1: digital 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.4.3 omAgcOn R Auto AGC status   0: off   1: on 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.5 standBy   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.5.1 sbEnable RW LCD stand-by button enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.310.5.2 sbStatus R Current device mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311 ssbtTsOverIP   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1 inputChannels   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.1 icIgmpEnable RW IGMP enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.2 icNumber R Number of input Ethernet channels. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3 icTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1 icEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.1 icIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.2 icDescr R Description of input channel 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.3 icLocalIpAddr RW IP address 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.4 icLocalPort RW Port
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 165 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.1.3.1.5 icSourceClkReference RW Source clock reference selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2 outputChannels   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.1 ocPort RW UDP port 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.2 ocNumber R Number of output Ethernet channels. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3 ocTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1 ocEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.1 ocIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.2 ocDescr R Description of output channel 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.3 ocStatus R Tansmission state 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.4 ocDestIpAddr RW Destination IP address 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.5 ocDestPhysAddr R Destination MAC address 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.6 ocDestPort RW Destination port 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.7 ocInputSelector RW Input selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.8 ocProtocol RW Transmission protocol 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.9 ocPckFormat RW Packet format 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.10 ocPckPerFrame RW Number of TS packets per frame (when the packet format is 204, the maximum number of packets per frame is 6) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.11 ocSsrc RW SSRC identifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.12 ocSourceClkReference RW Source clock reference selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.311.2.3.1.13 ocEnable RW Transmission enable 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313 ssbtT2Modulation   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1 t2mSettings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.1 t2msUseT2Mi RW T2-MI enable   0: disabled   1: enabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.2 t2msMiPid RW T2-MI PID setting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.3 t2msNetworkMode RW Transmitter mode selection   0 : MFN    1: SFN 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.4 t2msPresetConfig RW Enables the use of preset configurations when the T2-MI is disabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.5 t2msPresetConfigNum RW Configuration number selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.6 t2msConfigChanged R Shows the status of the configuration 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.7 t2msLoadConfig W Load configuration command 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.8 t2msAutoRegen RW Enables the Automatic Regeneration function. This funcion allows to retrieve the configuration  data from the input demodulator and to automatically increment the REGEN_FLAG field of the L1-Pre signalling."
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 166 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.9 t2msAutoRfLoop RW Enables the Automatic Frequency Loop function. This funcion allows to automatically set the FREQUENCY field of the L1-Post signalling to the   currently used RF output frequency." 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10 t2msPidMode   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.1 t2mspmAutoPidEn RW Enables the automatic detection of the T2-MI PID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.2 t2mspmDetectedPid R Shows the detected T2-MI PID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.3 t2mspmUsedPid R Shows the currently used T2-MI PID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.4 t2mspmStatus R Shows the status of the T2-MI PID mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.1.10.5 t2mspmError R Automatic T2-MI PID mode error 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2 t2mCurrentParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.1 t2mcpSource R Current parameters source 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2 t2mcpL1Pre   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.1 t2mcpL1PreType R Input stream type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.2 t2mcpL1PreBwt R BWT extension indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.3 t2mcpL1PreS1 R S1 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.4 t2mcpL1PreS2 R S2 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.5 t2mcpL1PreFftSize R FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.6 t2mcpL1PreMixed R Mixed indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.7 t2mcpL1PreL1Repeat R L1 repeat enable flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.8 t2mcpL1PreGuardInterval R Guard Interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.9 t2mcpL1PrePapr R PAPR 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.10 t2mcpL1PreL1Mod R L1 modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.11 t2mcpL1PreL1CodeRate R L1 code rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.12 t2mcpL1PreL1Fec R L1 FEC Type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.13 t2mcpL1PreL1PostSize R L1 Post Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.14 t2mcpL1PreL1PostInfoSize R L1 Post Info Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2 t2mCurrentParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.1 t2mcpSource R Current parameters source 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2 t2mcpL1Pre   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.1 t2mcpL1PreType R Input stream type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.2 t2mcpL1PreBwt R BWT extension indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.3 t2mcpL1PreS1 R S1 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.4 t2mcpL1PreS2 R S2 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.5 t2mcpL1PreFftSize R FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.6 t2mcpL1PreMixed R Mixed indicator
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 167 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.7 t2mcpL1PreL1Repeat R L1 repeat enable flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.8 t2mcpL1PreGuardInterval R Guard Interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.9 t2mcpL1PrePapr R PAPR 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.10 t2mcpL1PreL1Mod R L1 modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.11 t2mcpL1PreL1CodeRate R L1 code rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.12 t2mcpL1PreL1Fec R L1 FEC Type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.13 t2mcpL1PreL1PostSize R L1 Post Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.14 t2mcpL1PreL1PostInfoSize R L1 Post Info Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.15 t2mcpL1PrePilotPattern R Pilot Pattern 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.16 t2mcpL1PreTxIdAvailability R TX Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.17 t2mcpL1PreCellId R Cell Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.18 t2mcpL1PreT2NetworkId R T2 Network Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.19 t2mcpL1PreT2SystemId R T2 System Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.20 t2mcpL1PreNumT2Frames R Number of T2 frames 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.21 t2mcpL1PreNumDataSymb R Number of data symbols 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.22 t2mcpL1PreRegenFlag R Regeneration count indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.23 t2mcpL1PreL1PostExt R L1 Post extension enabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.24 t2mcpL1PreRfIndex R The current RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.2.25 t2mcpL1PreT2Version R T2 version 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3 t2mcpL1Post   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.1 t2mcpL1PostSubSliceNum R Number of sub-slices per frame 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.2 t2mcpL1PostFefType R The type of the associated FEF part 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.3 t2mcpL1PostFefLength R FEF length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.4 t2mcpL1PostFefInterval R FEF interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5 t2mcpL1PostAux   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.1 t2mcpL1PostAuxNum R Number of AUXs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2 t2mcpL1PostAuxTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1 t2mcpL1PostAuxEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1.1 t2mcpL1PostAuxIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1.2 t2mcpL1PostAuxStreamType R The type of the current auxiliary stream 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.5.2.1.3 t2mcpL1PostAuxPrivateConf R RFU 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6 t2mcpL1PostRf   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.1 t2mcpL1PostNumRf R The number of RF frequencies in use 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2 t2mcpL1PostRfTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1 t2mcpL1PostRfEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1.1 t2mcpL1PostRfIndex R
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 168 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1.2 t2mcpL1PostRfIdx R RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.6.2.1.3 t2mcpL1PostFrequency R Frequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7 t2mcpL1PostPlp   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.1 t2mcpL1PostPlpNum R Number of PLPs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2 t2mcpL1PostPlpTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1 t2mcpL1PostPlpEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.1 t2mcpL1PostPlpIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.2 t2mcpL1PostPlpId R PLP ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.3 t2mcpL1PostPlpType R PLP type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.4 t2mcpL1PostPlpPayloadType R PLP payload type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.5 t2mcpL1PostFfFlag R FF flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.6 t2mcpL1PostFirstRfIdx R First RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.7 t2mcpL1PostFirstFrameIdx R First frame index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.8 t2mcpL1PostGroupId R PLP group id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.9 t2mcpL1PostPlpCod R The code rate used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.10 t2mcpL1PostPlpMod R The modulation used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.11 t2mcpL1PostPlpRotation R DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.12 t2mcpL1PostPlpFec R The FEC type used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.13 t2mcpL1PostNumBlocksMax R Maximum number of PLP blocks 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.14 t2mcpL1PostFrameInterval R Frame interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.15 t2mcpL1PostTimeIntLength R Time interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.16 t2mcpL1PostTimeIntType R Time interleaving type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.17 t2mcpL1PostInbandA R In-band A flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.18 t2mcpL1PostInbandB R In-band B flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.19 t2mcpL1PostPlpMode R PLP mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.20 t2mcpL1PostStaticFlag R Static flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.2.3.7.2.1.21 t2mcpL1PostStaticPaddFlag R Static padding flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3 t2mLocal   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1 t2mlL1Pre   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.1 t2mlL1PreType RW Input stream type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.2 t2mlL1PreBwt RW BWT extension indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.3 t2mlL1PreS1 RW S1 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.4 t2mlL1PreS2 R S2 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.5 t2mlL1PreFftSize RW FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.6 t2mlL1PreMixed RW Mixed indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.7 t2mlL1PreL1Repeat RW L1 repeat enable flag
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 169 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.8 t2mlL1PreGuardInterval RW Guard Interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.9 t2mlL1PrePapr RW PAPR 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.10 t2mlL1PreL1Mod RW L1 modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.11 t2mlL1PreL1CodeRate RW L1 code rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.12 t2mlL1PreL1Fec RW L1 FEC Type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.13 t2mlL1PreL1PostSize R L1 Post Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.14 t2mlL1PreL1PostInfoSize R L1 Post Info Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.15 t2mlL1PrePilotPattern RW Pilot Pattern 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.16 t2mlL1PreTxIdAvailability RW TX Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.17 t2mlL1PreCellId RW Cell Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.18 t2mlL1PreT2NetworkId RW T2 Network Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.19 t2mlL1PreT2SystemId RW T2 System Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.20 t2mlL1PreNumT2Frames RW Number of T2 frames 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.21 t2mlL1PreNumDataSymb RW Number of data symbols 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.22 t2mlL1PreRegenFlag RW Regeneration count indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.23 t2mlL1PreL1PostExt RW L1 Post extension enabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.24 t2mlL1PreRfIndex RW The current RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.1.25 t2mlL1PreT2Version RW T2 version 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2 t2mlL1Post   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.1 t2mlL1PostSubSliceNum RW Number of sub-slices per frame 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.2 t2mlL1PostFefType RW The type of the associated FEF part 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.3 t2mlL1PostFefLength RW FEF length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.4 t2mlL1PostFefInterval RW FEF interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5 t2mlL1PostAux   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.1 t2LL1PostAuxNum RW Number of AUXs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2 t2LL1PostAuxTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1 t2LL1PostAuxEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1.1 t2LL1PostAuxIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1.2 t2LL1PostAuxStreamType RW The type of the current auxiliary stream 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.5.2.1.3 t2LL1PostAuxPrivateConf RW RFU 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6 t2mlL1PostRf   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.1 t2LL1PostNumRf RW The number of RF frequencies in use 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2 t2LL1PostRfTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1 t2LL1PostRfEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1.1 t2LL1PostRfIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1.2 t2LL1PostRfIdx RW RF index
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 170 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.6.2.1.3 t2LL1PostFrequency RW Frequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7 t2mlL1PostPlp   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.1 t2mlL1PostPlpNum RW Number of PLPs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2 t2mlL1PostPlpTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1 t2mlL1PostPlpEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.1 t2mlL1PostPlpIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.2 t2mlL1StreamFormat RW Input stream format 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.3 t2mlL1SisMis RW Single or multiple input streams 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.4 t2mlL1CcmAcm RW Input stream format 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.5 t2mlL1Issyi RW Input stream sinchronization indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.6 t2mlL1Npd RW Null packet deletion 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.7 t2mlL1PostPlpId RW PLP ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.8 t2mlL1PostPlpType RW PLP type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.9 t2mlL1PostPlpPayloadType RW PLP payload type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.10 t2mlL1PostFfFlag RW FF flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.11 t2mlL1PostFirstRfIdx RW First RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.12 t2mlL1PostFirstFrameIdx RW First frame index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.13 t2mlL1PostGroupId RW PLP group id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.14 t2mlL1PostPlpCod RW The code rate used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.15 t2mlL1PostPlpMod RW The modulation used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.16 t2mlL1PostPlpRotation RW DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.17 t2mlL1PostPlpFec RW The FEC type used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.18 t2mlL1PostNumBlocksMax RW Maximum number of PLP blocks 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.19 t2mlL1PostFrameInterval RW Frame interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.20 t2mlL1PostTimeIntLength RW Time interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.21 t2mlL1PostTimeIntType RW Time interleaving type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.22 t2mlL1PostInbandA RW In-band A flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.23 t2mlL1PostInbandB RW In-band B flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.24 t2mlL1PostPlpMode RW PLP mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.25 t2mlL1PostStaticFlag RW Static flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.2.7.2.1.26 t2mlL1PostStaticPaddFlag RW Static padding flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3 t2mlFunctions   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3.1 t2mlfTxIdentifier RW Transmitter identifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3.2 t2mlfTxMisoGroup   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.313.3.3.2.1 misoGroup RW MISO group 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315 ssbtMeasure
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 171 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1 t2Measure   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1 t2mStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.1 meas1RxLevel R Output RX level   127: over input   -128: low power   -63...62: power expressed in dB 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.2 meas2RxLevel R Output RX level   127: over input   -128: low power   -63...62: power expressed in dB 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.3 measCarrierOffset R Output carrier offset 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.4 measIfAgc R Output IF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.5 measRfAgc R Output RF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.6 measTsLock R Demodulated TS Lock 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.7 measSyncStat R Sync statistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.8 measMer R Output MER [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.9 measSnr R Output SNR [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.10 measPreLdpcBer R Output Pre LDPC BER  [1e7] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.11 measPostBchFer R Output Post BCH FER  [1e6] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.12 measPreBchBer R Output Pre BCH BER  [1e9] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.13 measDemodPpm R Demodulated PPM  [ppmx1e2] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.14 measSignalQuality R Signal quality [%] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.1.15 measLdpcIter R LDPC iterations per minute 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2 t2mL1Pre   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.1 t2mL1PreType R Input stream type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.2 t2mL1PreBwt R BWT extension indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.3 t2mL1PreS1 R S1 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.4 t2mL1PreS2 R S2 field 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.5 t2mL1PreFftSize R FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.6 t2mL1PreMixed R Mixed indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.7 t2mL1PreL1Repeat R L1 repeat enable flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.8 t2mL1PreGuardInterval R Guard Interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.9 t2mL1PrePapr R PAPR 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.10 t2mL1PreL1Mod R L1 modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.11 t2mL1PreL1CodeRate R L1 code rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.12 t2mL1PreL1Fec R L1 FEC Type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.13 t2mL1PreL1PostSize R L1 Post Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.14 t2mL1PreL1PostInfoSize R L1 Post Info Size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.15 t2mL1PrePilotPattern R Pilot Pattern 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.16 t2mL1PreTxIdAvailability R TX Id
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 172 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.17 t2mL1PreCellId R Cell Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.18 t2mL1PreT2NetworkId R T2 Network Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.19 t2mL1PreT2SystemId R T2 System Id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.20 t2mL1PreNumT2Frames R Number of T2 frames 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.21 t2mL1PreNumDataSymb R Number of data symbols 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.22 t2mL1PreRegenFlag R Regeneration count indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.23 t2mL1PreL1PostExt R L1 Post extension enabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.2.24 t2mL1PreRfIndex R The current RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3 t2mL1Post   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.1 t2mL1PostSubSliceNum R Number of sub-slices per frame 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.2 t2mL1PostFefType R The type of the associated FEF part 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.3 t2mL1PostFefLength R FEF length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.4 t2mL1PostFefInterval R FEF interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5 t2mL1PostAux   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.1 t2mL1PostAuxNum R Number of AUXs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2 t2mL1PostAuxTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1 t2mL1PostAuxEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1.1 t2mL1PostAuxIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1.2 t2mL1PostAuxStreamType R The type of the current auxiliary stream 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.5.2.1.3 t2mL1PostAuxPrivateConf R RFU 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6 t2mL1PostRf   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.1 t2mL1PostNumRf R The number of RF frequencies in use 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2 t2mL1PostRfTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1 t2mL1PostRfEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1.1 t2mL1PostRfIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1.2 t2mL1PostRfIdx R RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.6.2.1.3 t2mL1PostFrequency R Frequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7 t2mL1PostPlp   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.1 t2mL1PostPlpNum R Number of PLPs 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2 t2mL1PostPlpTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1 t2mL1PostPlpEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.1 t2mL1PostPlpIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.2 t2mL1PostPlpId R PLP ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.3 t2mL1PostPlpType R PLP type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.4 t2mL1PostPlpPayloadType R PLP payload type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.5 t2mL1PostFfFlag R FF flag
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 173 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.6 t2mL1PostFirstRfIdx R First RF index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.7 t2mL1PostFirstFrameIdx R First frame index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.8 t2mL1PostGroupId R PLP group id 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.9 t2mL1PostPlpCod R The code rate used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.10 t2mL1PostPlpMod R The modulation used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.11 t2mL1PostPlpRotation R DVBT2 rotated constellation indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.12 t2mL1PostPlpFec R The FEC type used by the associated PLP 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.13 t2mL1PostNumBlocksMax R Maximum number of PLP blocks 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.14 t2mL1PostFrameInterval R Frame interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.15 t2mL1PostTimeIntLength R Time interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.16 t2mL1PostTimeIntType R Time interleaving type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.17 t2mL1PostInbandA R In-band A flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.18 t2mL1PostInbandB R In-band B flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.19 t2mL1PostPlpMode R PLP mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.20 t2mL1PostStaticFlag R Static flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.1.3.7.2.1.21 t2mL1PostStaticPaddFlag R Static padding flag 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2 tMeasure   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1 tmStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.1 tmsRxLevel R Output RX level   127: over input   -128: low power   -63...62: power expressed in dB 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.2 tmsCarrierOffset R Output carrier offset 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.3 tmsIfAgc R Output IF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.4 tmsRfAgc R Output RF AGC level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.5 tmsTsLock R Demodulated TS Lock 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.6 tmsSyncStat R Sync statistics 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.7 tmsMer R Output MER [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.8 tmsSnr R Output SNR [dBx1e3] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.9 tmsPreVitBer R Output Pre LDPC BER  [1e7] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.10 tmsPreRsBer R Output Post BCH FER  [1e6] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.11 tmsRsErrCount R Output Pre BCH BER  [1e9] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.12 tmsDemodPpm R Demodulated PPM  [ppmx1e2] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.1.13 tmsSignalQuality R Signal quality [%] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2 tmDemodParams   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.1 tmdpConstellation R Constellation for current modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.2 tmdpHierMode R Hierarchy information for current modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.3 tmdpHpCodeRate R High Priority Code Rate
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 174 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.4 tmdpLpCodeRate R Low Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.5 tmdpFft R FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.6 tmdpGuardInterval R Guard interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.2.2.7 tmdpCelllId R Cell identifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3 isdbtMeasure   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1 imStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.1 imsMonTxLevel R Output TX level monitor  127: over input   -128: low power   -63...62: power expressed in dB 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.2 imsIfLevel R Measured IF level 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.3 imsIfAgcDac R Measured IF AGC output DAC value 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.4 imsDemState R The state of the Meausure board sequencer 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.5 imsMode R Mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.6 imsGuardInterval R Guard interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.7 imsSTRFreqErr R Frequency error detected  by symbol timing recovery [Hz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.8 imsCRFreqErr R Frequency error detected  by carrier recovery [kHz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.1.9 imsCN R Estimated Carrier to Noise ratio (dB x 10) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2 imLayerStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.1 imlsNumber R The number of Layers 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2 imlsTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1 imlsEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.1 imlsIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.2 imlsDescr R Layer description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.3 imlsMod R Modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.4 imlsCodeRate R Code rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.5 imlsTILength R Time Interleaving length 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.6 imlsSegNum R Number of segments 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.7 imlsMer R MER [dB] (* 10) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.8 imlsPreVitBer R Pre-Viterbi BER (* 10^9) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.9 imlsPostVitBer R Post-Viterbi BER (* 10^9) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.3.2.2.1.10 imlsPktErrRate R Packet Error Rate (* 10^9) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4 atscMeasure   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1 amStatistics   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.1 amsFrequencyOffset R Output carrier offset 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.2 amsDemodStatus R VSB demodulation status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.3 amsEqStatus R Equalizer status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.4 amsDemLock R Demodulator lock status
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 175 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.5 amsAgcLock R Digital AGC lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.6 amsFrameLock R Frame lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.7 amsCarrierFreqLoopLock R Carrier frequency loop lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.8 amsTimingFreqLoopLock R Timing frequency loop lock status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.9 amsSnr R Signal to Noise Ratio [dB] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.10 amsSer R Segment Error Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.315.4.1.11 amsBer R Bit Error Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317 ssbtCommon   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1 info   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.1 infoName RW The station identifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.2 infoManufacturer R Manufacturer  name 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3 infoVersion   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.1 versionNumber R Number of software versions 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2 versionTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1 versionEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1.1 versionIndex R Software version index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1.2 versionDescr R Software description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.3.2.1.3 versionVersion R Software version 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4 infoHw   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.1 hwNumber R Number of devices 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2 hwTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1 hwEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.1 hwIndex R Device index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.2 hwDescr R Device description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.3 hwSerialNumber R Serial number 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.1.4.2.1.4 hwUniqueId R Unique device ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2 settings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.1 sDate RW Device date and time as specified in SNMPv2-TC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2 sSystem   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2.1 ssLoadConfig W Load configuration  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2.2 ssSaveConfig W Save configuration 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.2.2.3 ssReset W Reset board 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3 events   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.1 evNumber R The total number of alarms 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.2 evOverwritten R The events list has been overwritten. Obsolete events began to be overwritten."
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 176 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.3 evPageSel RW Events page selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4 evTable NA Events table 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1 evEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.1 evIndex R Event index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.2 evNum R Event number. 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.3 evDate R Event date and time as specified in SNMPv2-TC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.4 evCode R Event code 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.3.4.1.5 evDescr R Event description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4 alarms   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.1 alNumber R The total number of alarms 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.2 alSeverityStatus R Maximum severity 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3 alThresholds   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.1 altNumber R Number of alarm thresholds 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2 altTable NA Alarm thresholds table 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1 altEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.1 altIndex R Threshold index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.2 altDescr R Threshold description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.3 altAlarmCode R Code of the alarm this threshold is referred to 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.4 altMeasUnit R Temperature unit of measurement 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.3.2.1.5 altSetting RW Threshold setting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4 alTable NA Alarms table. This table contains all alarms that can be managed by screen service devices" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1 alEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.1 alIndex R Alarm index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.2 alStatus R Alarm status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.3 alCode R Alarm code 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.4 alDescr R Alarm description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.5 alSeverity R Severity associated to the alarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.6 alTrapManager1 RW Enables trap messages to be sent to the manager with IP address 1" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.7 alTrapManager2 RW Enables trap messages to be sent to the manager with IP address 2" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.8 alTrapManager3 RW Enables trap messages to be sent to the manager with IP address 3" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.9 alR0Enable RW Enables relay 0 to be switched on/off depending on the status of this alarm"
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 177 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.10 alR1Enable RW Enables relay 1 to be switched on/off depending on the status of this alarm" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.11 alR2Enable RW Enables relay 2 to be switched on/off depending on the status of this alarm" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.12 alR3Enable RW Enables relay 3 to be switched on/off depending on the status of this alarm" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.13 alFrontPanelEnable RW Enables this alarm to be notified on LCD display 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.14 alJavaEnable RW Enables this alarm to be notified on the Java alarm page icon" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.15 alEventEnable RW Enables this alarm to be notified through an event 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.16 alRfOffEnable RW Enables this alarm to switch off the output RF signal 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.4.4.1.17 alAutoSwitchEnable RW Enables this alarm to trigger the automatic input switching 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5 snmp   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.1 managerTrapNumber R Number of manager Trap IP addresses 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2 managerTrapTable NA Manager Trap IP addresses table 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2.1 managerTrapEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2.1.1 managerTrapIndex R SNMP Manager index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.2.1.2 managerTrapIp RW SNMP Manager IP listening address 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3 traps   "Traps section" 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3.1 alarmTraps1  Traps definition for Trap Manager 1. An alarmTrap1 trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms table." 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3.2 alarmTraps2  Traps definition for Trap Manager 2. An alarmTrap2 trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms table." 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.5.3.3 alarmTraps3  Traps definition for Trap Manager 3. An alarmTrap3 trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms table." 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6 mode   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.1 transmissionMode RW The transmission mode of the device 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2 modesManagement   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.1 mmNumber R Number of available modes 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2 mmTable NA Modes management table 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1 mmEntry
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 178 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1.1 mmIndex R Mode index 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1.2 mmType R Mode type 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.317.6.2.2.1.3 mmStatus R Mode status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321 ssbtNetwork   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1 netInterfaces   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.1 nifNumber R The number of network interfaces 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2 nifTable NA  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1 nifEntry   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.1 nifIndex R  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.2 nifDescr R Interface description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.3 nifType R The type of interface 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.4 nifIpAddr R The IP address of this entry 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.5 nifPhysAddr R The physical address of this entry 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.6 nifNetMask R The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.7 nifGateway R The gateway IP address of this entry 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.8 nifSpeed R The current bandwidth of this interface 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.9 nifInPkts R The number of packets delivered to higher-level protocol 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.321.1.2.1.10 nifInErr R The number of inbound packets that contained errors 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325 ssbtTModulation   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1 tmSettings   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.1 tmsNetworkMode RW Network mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.2 tmsMip   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.2.1 tmsmHPStatus R High Priority MIP status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.1.2.2 tmsmLPStatus R Low Priority MIP status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2 tmMipParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1 tmmpModulationParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.1 tmmpmpFft R MIP FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.2 tmmpmpConstellation R MIP Constellation 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.3 tmmpmpBandwidth R MIP bandwidth 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.4 tmmpmpFecHp R MIP High Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.5 tmmpmpFecLp R MIP Low Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.6 tmmpmpAlpha R MIP hierarchy information for current modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.1.7 tmmpmpGuardInterval R MIP guard interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2 tmmpDvbhParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.1 tmmpdpTimeSlicingHp R MIP High Priority Time Slicing
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 179 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.2 tmmpdpTimeSlicingLp R MIP Low Priority Time Slicing 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.3 tmmpdpMpeFecHp R High Priority MPE-FEC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.4 tmmpdpMpeFecLp R Low Priority MPE-FEC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.2.5 tmmpdpInterleaver R MIP native/in-depth symbol interleaver selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3 tmmpMipFunctions   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.1 tmmpmfTxId   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.1.1 tmmpmftiNumber RW Transmitter identifier 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.1.2 tmmpmftiEnableTxId0 RW Enables the TX ID 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2 tmmpmfCellId   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.1 tmmpmfciEnable RW Enables the Cell ID function 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.2 tmmpmfciFunctionEnable R Enable function status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.3 tmmpmfciFunctionTag R Cell id function tag detection status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.4 tmmpmfciStatus R Cell id function 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.2.5 tmmpmfciWaitForEnable R Cell id function wait for enable status 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.3 tmmpmfMaxDelay R MIP maximum delay [100ns] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.4 tmmpmfFrequencyOffset   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.4.1 tmmpmffoEnable RW Enables the MIP frequency offset function 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.4.2 tmmpmffoStatus R MIP frequency offset function [Hz]  1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.5 tmmpmfTimeOffset   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.5.1 tmmpmftoEnable RW Enables the MIP time offset function 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.2.3.5.2 tmmpmftoStatus R MIP time offset function [100ns] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3 tmLocalParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1 tmlpModulationParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.1 tmlpmpFft RW FFT size 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.2 tmlpmpConstellation RW Constellation 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.3 tmlpmpFecHp RW High Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.4 tmlpmpFecLP RW Low Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.5 tmlpmpAlpha RW Hierarchy information for current modulation scheme 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.1.6 tmlpmpGuardInterval RW Guard interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2 tmlpDvbhParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.1 tmlpdpTimeSlicingHp RW Enables the High Priority Time Slicing 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.2 tmlpdpTimeSlicingLp RW Enables the Low Priority Time Slicing 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.3 tmlpdpMpeFecHp RW Enables the High Priority MPE-FEC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.4 tmlpdpMpeFecLp RW Enables the Low Priority MPE-FEC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.2.5 tmlpdpInterleaver RW Symbol interleaver selector 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3 tmlpMipFunctions
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 180 of 206 OID Name R/W Description 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.1 tmlpmfCellIdEnable RW Enables the use of the locally set Cell ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.2 tmlpmfCellId RW Local cell id setting 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.3 tmlpmflDelay RW User delay setting 100ns] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.4 tmlpmfFrequencyOffset RW Frequency offset setting [Hz] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.3.3.5 tmlpmfTimeOffset RW Time offset setting [100ns] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4 tmCurrentParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1 tmcpModulationParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.1 tmcpmpFft R Used transmission mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.2 tmcpmpConstellation R Used constellation 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.3 tmcpmpBandwidth R Used bandwidth 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.4 tmcpmpFecHp R Used High Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.5 tmcpmpFecLp R Used Low Priority Code Rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.6 tmcpmpAlpha R Used hierarchical mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.1.7 tmcpmpGuardInterval R Used guard interval 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2 tmcpDvbhParameters   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.1 tmcpdpTimeSlicingHp R Used High Priority Time Slicing 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.2 tmcpdpTimeSlicingLp R Used Low Priority Time Slicing 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.3 tmcpdpMpeFecHp R Used High Priority MPE-FEC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.4 tmcpdpMpeFecLp R Used Low Priority MPE-FEC 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.2.5 tmcpdpInterleaver R Used symbol interleaver 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3 tmcpsMipFunctions   1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.1 tmcpmfCellId R Used Cell ID 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.2 tmcpmfSystemDelay R System delay indicator [100ns] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.3 tmcpmfFrequencyOffset R Used frequency offset 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.4 tmcpmfTimeOffset R Used time offset [100ns] 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.5 tmcpmfCentreFrequency R Centre frequency indicator (expressed in Hz) 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.6 tmcpmfNetworkDelay R Network delay [100ns] indicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.21678.325.4.3.7 tmcpmfDeviceDelay R Shows the device delay [100ns]
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 181 of 206 7.3 Events Monitoring  In MIB ssbtCommon the events node allows the monitoring of events.  evNumber object specifies the total number of events stored in memory. evOverwritten  object  notifies  if the  events list  exceeded  the  memory limit.  If this object  returns  “1”,  obsolete events have begun to be overwritten. evPageSel object selects which page has to be monitored through the events table. Each page is composed by 16 events. The total number of entries of the evTable is fixed to 16. Each entry in the table is defined as follows: EvEntry ::= SEQUENCE { evIndex INTEGER, evNum INTEGER, evDate DateAndTime, evCode EvType, evDescr DisplayString }  evIndex is the index of the specific entry. evNum object specifies the numerical order of the specific entry. evDate object provides the date and time of the event generation as specified in SNMv2-TC. evCode object provides the Type of the specific entry (ref. to Events chapter for further information). evDescr object provides the Description of the specific entry (ref. to Events chapter for further information).
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 182 of 206 7.4 Configuring alarm masks and alarm thresholds  In  ssbtCommon  MIB  the  alarms  node  allows  the  monitoring  of  alarms  status,  the  setting  of  alarm  masks  and thresholds.  7.4.1 Alarms Table  The alTable table is used to monitor alarms status and to set alarm masks.  alNumber object specifies the total number  of  entries  in  the  alarms  table.  alSeverityStatus  specifies  the  maximum  severity  of  currently  raised alarms. Each entry in the table is defined as follows: AlEntry ::= SEQUENCE { alIndex INTEGER, alStatus OnOff, alCode INTEGER, alDescr DisplayString, alSeverity Severity, alTrapManager1 EnDis, alTrapManager2 EnDis, alTrapManager3 EnDis, alR1Enable EnDis, alR2Enable EnDis, alR3Enable EnDis, alR4Enable EnDis, alFrontPanelEnable EnDis, alJavaEnable EnDis, alEventEnable EnDis, alRfOffEnable EnDis, alAutoSwitchEnable EnDis }  alIndex is the index of the specific entry. alStatus object shows the alarm status (on/off). alCode object univocally identifies the alarm (refer to Alarms Code and Description table). alDescr object provides a textual description of the specific entry (refer to Alarms Code and Description table for the complete list of alarms descriptions). alSeverity defines the severity associated to the alarm. alTrapManager1 object allows to enable trap messages, associated to the entry, to be sent to the manager with IP address 1
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 183 of 206 alTrapManager2 object allows to enable trap messages, associated to the entry, to be sent to the manager with IP address 2 alTrapManager3 object allows to enable trap messages, associated to the entry, to be sent to the manager with IP address 3 alR0Enable,  alR1Enable,  alR2Enable,  alR3Enable  objects  enable  relay  0,  1,  2,  3  respectively,  to  be  switched on/off depending on the status of this entry. alFrontPanelEnable object enables the alarm to be notified on LCD display lighting the alarm button and listing the alarms in the Alarms menu. alJavaEnable enables the alarm to be notified on the Java alarm page icon. alEventEnable enables the alarm to be notified through an event. alRfOffEnable enables the entry to switch off the RF output. alAutoSwitchEnable enables the entry to trigger the automatic input switching. Alarms  are  divided  in  two  different  classes:  common  alarms  and  mode-specific  alarms.  Common  alarms  are those which are HW dependant or  are dependent  on how the operating  system has been designed.  Common alarms  are  shared  by  all  the  operational  modes.  Mode-specific  alarms  are  those  which  depend  on  the implemented  functionalities  and  standards.  Mode-specific  alarms  can  be  easily  recognized  thanks  to  the addition of the mode prefix enclosed in squared brackets. The  alarms  table  lists  both  common  and  mode-specific  alarms.  Indexes  of  alarms  may  change  from  one operational mode to another, but alarm codes do not. Alarm codes of common alarms are the same whatever the working mode. Alarm codes of mode-specific alarms uniquely identify the specific alarm and are not shared by operational modes.  Table 31.  Alarms Code and Description alDescr Alarm Description Alarm Code Temp. High Temperature High Alarm 0 Temp. High -3dB Temperature Level -3db 1 Temp. High Warning Temperature High Warning 2 Fans Speed Low Fans Speed Low 3 Alim Dialog Err Alim Dialog Err 4 FE Dialog Err FE Dialog Err 5 Meas Dialog Err Meas Dialog Err 6 GPS Dialog Err GPS Dialog Err 7 GPS Not Locked GPS Not Locked 8 120MHz Not Locked 120MHz Not Locked 9 960MHz Not Locked 960MHz Not Locked 10 Input PLL Not Locked Input PLL Not Locked 11 Out PLL Not Locked Output PLL Not Locked 12
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 184 of 206 alDescr Alarm Description Alarm Code 10MHz Not Locked 10MHz Not Locked 13 1PPS Not Locked 1 PPS Not Locked 14 FPGA Boot Err FPGA Boot Error 15 FWD Power High Forward Power High 16 FWD Pwr Low Warning Forward Power Low Warning 17 FWD Pwr Low Forward Power Low Alarm 18 Reflex Power High Reflex Power High 19 File System Err File System Error 20 File Err Bad File In File System 21 PS1 V Out Of Range PS Voltage Out Of Range 22 PS1 I Out Of Range PS Current Out Of Range 23 CPU Fan Err CPU Fan Error 24 Test Mode Test Mode 25 FE S2 Not Locked FE S2 not locked 26 FE S2 S/N Low FE S2 SNR Low 27 FE S2 BER High FE S2 BER high 28 [ATSC] No Input [ATSC] Input not valid 1056 [ATSC] Input Overflow [ATSC] Input overflow 1057 [ATSC] MH Err [ATSC] MH Error 1058 [ATSC] MEAS Demodulator Not Locked [ATSC] Meas Not Locked 1059 [ATSC] MEAS SNR Low [ATSC] Meas SNR Low 1060 [ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked [ATSC] FE Not Locked 1061 [ATSC] FE SNR Low [ATSC] FE SNR Low 1062 [ATSC] TVCT Not Present [ATSC] No TVCT 1063
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 185 of 206 7.4.2 Thresholds Table  The alThresholds subtree is used to set alarms thresholds. altNumber object specifies the total number of entries in the alarm thresholds table. Each entry in the table is defined as follows: AltEntry ::= SEQUENCE { altIndex INTEGER, altDescr DisplayString, altAlarmCode INTEGER, altMeasUnit MeasureType, altSetting INTEGER }  altIndex is the index of the specific entry. altDescr object provides a textual description of the specific entry (refer to Alarm Thresholds Description table for the complete list of thresholds descriptions). altAlarmCode  object  univocally  identifies  the  alarm  this  threshold  refers  to  (refer  to  Alarms  Code  and Description table). altMeasUnit object specifies the unit of measurement of the entry. altSetting object is used to set the threshold. The thresholds table lists both common and mode-specific alarm thresholds. Indexes of thresholds may change from  one  operational  mode  to  another,  but  alarm  codes  of  the  alarms  they  refer  to  do  not.  Alarm  codes  of common  alarms  are  the  same  whatever  the  working  mode.  Alarm  codes  of  mode-specific  alarms  uniquely identify the specific alarm and are not shared by operational modes.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 186 of 206 Table 32.  Alarm Thresholds Description altDescr Threshold Description Alarm Code Temp. High -3dB Temperature warning threshold expressed in °C. 1 Temp. High Warning Temperature alarm threshold expressed in °C. 2 FWD Pwr Low Warning Forward power warning threshold expressed in dB. 17 FWD Pwr Low Forward power alarm threshold expressed in dB. 18 FE Squelch [DVB-T2] FE Squelch alarm threshold expressed in dB. 1315 FE Pre LDPC BER [DVB-T2] FE Pre LDPC BER alarm threshold expressed in dB*1e7. 1316 FE SNR Low [DVB-T2] FE Signal to Noise alarm threshold expressed in dB*1e3. 1317 FE MER Low [DVB-T2] FE MER alarm threshold expressed in dB*1e3. 1318 FE S.Quality Low [DVB-T2] FE Signal Quality alarm threshold. 1319 Meas Pre LDPC BER [DVB-T2] Measure Pre LDPC BER alarm threshold expressed in dB*1e7. 1321 Meas SNR Low [DVB-T2] Measure Signal to Noise alarm threshold expressed in dB*1e3. 1322 Meas MER Low [DVB-T2] Measure MER alarm threshold expressed in dB*1e3. 1323 Meas S.Quality Low [DVB-T2] Measure Signal Quality alarm threshold. 1324 FE LDPC Mean Err [DVB-T2] FE LDPC Mean Error alarm threshold 1330 MEAS LDPC Mean Err [DVB-T2] Measure LDPC Mean Error alarm threshold 1331 FE Squelch [DVB-T] FE Squelch alarm threshold. 809 FE Pre Viterbi BER [DVB-T] FE PreViterbi BER High alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e7). 810 FE SNR Low [DVB-T] FE SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e3). 811 FE MER Low [DVB-T] FE MER Low alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e3). 812 FE S.Quality Low [DVB-T] FE Signal Quality Low alarm threshold. 813 Meas Pre Viterbi BER [DVB-T] MEAS PreViterbi BER High alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e7). 815 Meas SNR Low [DVB-T] MEAS SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e3). 816 Meas MER Low [DVB-T] MEAS MER Low alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e3). 817
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 187 of 206 altDescr Threshold Description Alarm Code Meas S.Quality Low [DVB-T] MEAS Signal Quality Low alarm threshold. 818 FE SNR Low [ATSC] FE SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e3). 1062 Meas SNR Low [ATSC] MEAS SNR Low alarm threshold (expressed in dB*1e3). 1060
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 188 of 206 7.5 Traps  While a management station can poll, at fixed time interval, all the agents it knows for some key information, each  agent  is  responsible  for  notifying  the  management  station  of  any  alarm  condition.  These  events  are communicated in SNMP messages known as traps. The following parameters shall be set in order to correctly configure traps:  SNMP Agent Port: 162.  SNMP Agent Transport protocol: IP/UDP.  7.5.1 SNMPv1  ARK6 devices transmit alarm-specific traps. For every Trap Manager there is a different SNMPv1 trap definition:  alarmTrap1 TRAP-TYPE ENTERPRISE  ssbt VARIABLES   { alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity} DESCRIPTION "Traps definition for Trap Manager 1" ::= 0  alarmTrap2 TRAP-TYPE ENTERPRISE  ssbt VARIABLES   { alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity} DESCRIPTION "Traps definition for Trap Manager 2" ::= 1  alarmTrap3 TRAP-TYPE ENTERPRISE  ssbt VARIABLES   { alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity} DESCRIPTION "Traps definition for Trap Manager 3" ::= 2
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 189 of 206 VARIABLES clause defines the ordered sequence of MIB objects, belonging  to the specific entry of the alTable, which are contained within every instance of the trap type. Each variable is placed, in order, inside the variable-bindings field of the SNMP Trap Message as shown in the following figure (refer to  Alarms Table paragraph for further information about alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDesc, alSeverity objects). Figure 58. SNMPv1 Trap Messages
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 190 of 206 7.5.2 SNMPv2  ARK6 devices transmit alarm-specific traps. For every Trap Manager there is a different SNMv2 trap definition:  traps OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { snmp 3 }  alarmTraps1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE OBJECTS {alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}  STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Traps definition for Trap Manager 1. An alarmTrap1 trap signifies that the sending  protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms  table."  ::= { traps 1 }   alarmTraps2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE OBJECTS {alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}  STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Traps definition for Trap Manager 2. An alarmTrap2 trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms table." ::= { traps 2 }  alarmTraps3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE OBJECTS {alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDescr, alSeverity}  STATUS current DESCRIPTION "Traps definition for Trap Manager 3. An alarmTrap3 trap signifies that the sending protocol entity recognizes that some state transitions occurred in the alarms table." ::= { traps 3 }
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 191 of 206 VARIABLES clause defines the ordered sequence of MIB objects, belonging to the specific entry of the alTable, which are contained within every instance of the trap type. Each variable is placed, in order, inside the variable-bindings field of the SNMP Trap Message as shown in the following figure (refer to  Alarms Table paragraph for further information about alIndex, alStatus, alCode, alDesc, alSeverity objects). Figure 59. SNMPv2 Trap Messages
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 192 of 206 7.5.3 Configuring traps  Use Java (refer to Network and Alarms paragraphs for further information) or SNMP user interfaces to configure traps. The  configuration  of  traps  is  performed  through  the  setting  of  three  different  alarm  masks,  by  means  of alTrapManager1,  alTrapManager2,  alTrapManager3  objects  in  the  alTable  (refer  to  Alarms  Table  paragraph), and through the setting of the  destination IP Address of the receiving management  stations,  by means of the managerTrapTable in the snmp subtree in ssbtCommon MIB. managerTrapNumber object specifies the total number of entries in the trap manager address table. Each entry of the managerTrapTable is defined as follows:  ManagerTrapEntry ::= SEQUENCE { managerTrapIndex INTEGER, managerTrapIp IpAddress }  managerTrapIndex is the SNMP manager index. managerTrapIp object allows the setting of the SNMP manager IP listening address. There are up to 3 different manager IP addresses that can be configured, one for each alTrapManager mask.  The  Community  shown  in  trap  messages  can  be  set  from  Java  interface  in  the  Community  box  within  the Network window (refer to Network paragraph).
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 193 of 206 Appendix A. Automatic input source selection methods A.1 Input Autoswitch  The SDT ARK62 series supports an automatic switching control mechanism between incoming signal sources.  The ARK6 is capable of switching between inputs  on the basis of primary feed quality, depending on how it  is presented  to  the  transmitter  (RF,  ASI  –  Ethernet,  SDI  and  CVBS  feeds).  The  feed  switching  algorithm  is irrespective of payload and bitrate of both primary and reserve feeds. The primary input is selected from the drop-down list of Input Selector. It is not allowed to dynamically change the  preferred  input  until  the  Input  Autoswitch  is  enabled.  Secondary  inputs  are  checked  in  circular  order, starting from the one that follows the primary input. The numerical order is:  DVB-T - T2 - ISDB-T - ATSC ITU 1. ASI 1 2. ASI 2 3. ASI 3 4. ASI 4 5. Tuner 1/Tuner (if available) 6. Tuner 2 (if available) 7. GbE 2 ch1 8. GbE 2 ch2 1. SDI 1 2. SDI 2 3. SDI 3 4. SDI 4 5. CVBS 1 6. CVBS 2  E.g.  In DVB-T2 mode, if  Tuner  is  set to  priority  the  algorithm  for selecting  secondary  inputs  starts with  GbE 2 Ethernet channels and then works down all other ASI inputs starting from ASI 1. If  the  reserve  feed,  the  one  being  used,  does  not  meet  anymore  the  necessary  quality  requirements,  the secondary to secondary input switch mechanism will start from the input that follows the primary input.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 194 of 206 Input  switching rules can be selected in the Alarms page through the SWITCH  alarm mask and  depend on the transmission standard. Here below the available rules for each operative mode:   ITU [ITU] No Video Input [ITU] Input wrong standard ATSC [ATSC] No Input: input Transport Stream not locked [ATSC] Input Overflow: input TS overflow [ATSC] MH Err [ATSC] FE Demodulator Not Locked: input RF signal not locked [ATSC] FE SNR Low: RF input SNR under the alarm threshold [ATSC] No TVCT: TVCT table not present in the selected input stream
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 195 of 206 Feed selection and switching criteria are available via both transmitter SNMP and Java GUI interfaces. A Finite State Machine has been used to give a description of the behaviour of the system. The FSM of the Input Autoswitch algorithm consists of:  Four states: 1. Priority Input Locked  Condition: the primary feed is the one being used. 2. Priority Input Not Locked  Condition  1:  the  primary  feed  does  not  meet  the  necessary  quality  requirements  as well as reserve feeds, if any.  Condition 2: the primary feed does not meet the necessary quality requirements and the FSM is waiting for the primary to secondary feed changeover timeout to elapse. 3. Searching First Locked Input  Condition 1: the primary to secondary feed changeover timeout elapsed and the FSM is searching for a reserve feed.  Condition  2:  the  reserve  feed,  the  one  being  used,  does  not  meet  anymore  the necessary  quality  requirements,  the  secondary  to  secondary  input  switch  timeout elapsed and FSM is searching for another reserve feed. 4. Checking Priority Input  Condition: the reserve input is the one being used and FSM keeps checking the priority feed to trigger the secondary to primary changeover.  Three countdowns to N seconds, where N is defined by default in the *.def file: 1. Primary to Secondary Switch Counter  It  starts  when  the  primary  feed  does  not  meet  anymore  the  necessary  quality requirements and the system lay in waiting for the reserve feed to be checked. 2. Secondary to Secondary Switch Counter  It  starts  when  the  secondary  feed  does  not  meet  anymore  the  necessary  quality requirements and the system lay in waiting for another reserve feed to be checked.  3. Secondary to Primary Switch Counter  It  starts  when  the  input  set  to  priority  is  found  to  meet  again  the  necessary  quality requirements and the system is waiting to switch back to the primary input. Timeouts  are  reset  when  the  actually  used  input,  whether  it  is  the  preferred  one  or  not,  regain  his  quality requirements.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 196 of 206 A.2 Seamless input switching  SDT ARK6 series supports a seamless input switching algorithm that increases the reliability of the system in a SFN  environment.  The  developed  algorithm  is  capable  of  changing  input  signal  source  on  the  basis  of  MIP packets within the incoming Transport Stream. The algorithm provides a reserve feed to the apparatus in a SFN environment in the event that the primary input signal source does not meet anymore the SFN constrains.  The device is designed to manage the redundancy between two different sources in a SFN environment by seamless switching between them Both HP and LP streams have two different selected inputs. The two selected input are real-time analyzed under some  presence  and  validity  rules.  The  inputs  that  are  present  and  valid  are  eligible  to  be  sent  to  output  in dependence on the priority rule set. If only one input is present, then is sent to output without the application of any validity rule. The presence of an input is evaluated under the following rules:  The input is an ASI compliant (CEI EN 80083-9) encoded signal.  The input transports an MPEG-2 TS (ITU.T 13818-1) with no Synchronization Error (as  defined by ETSI ETR 290). The validity of an input is evaluated under the following rules:  The Transport Error flag (as defined by ITU.T 13818-1) does not rise in any packet.  The timing of reception of each input packet is inside the standard boundaries (as defined by ETSI ETR 290).  The SFN adaptation of the input TS is guaranteed by the presence of a correct MIP (as defined by ETSI TR 101 191), guaranteed by a CRC32 algorithm checking.  The TS data validity is guaranteed by the presence of PAT (as defined by ETSI EN 300 468) correct after a CRC32 algorithm checking.  The TS data validity is guaranteed by the presence of PMT (as defined by ETSI EN 300 468) correct after a CRC32 algorithm checking.  The total delay applied by the distribution network to the input signal is not higher than the Max Delay set by the SFN adapter.  The time window available to deliver the TS to the output is higher than the network margin applied. When  the  used  input  check  fails,  the  device  seamlessly  switches  to  the  secondary  input  if  present  and  valid, otherwise it continue to output the same flow despite of the validity rules check.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 197 of 206 Appendix B. Java Virtual Machine  The Java interface requires a host computer connected via Ethernet to the board with the proper Java Machine version installed.  B.1 Ethernet connection The host computer has to be connected via Ethernet to the board. Direct or crossed UTP category 6 cable is recommended. NOTE:  for  best  performances,  a  fast  connection  (i.e.  gigabit  Ethernet)  is  required.  After  careful  testing  it  was found that a slow connection makes it difficult the use of precorrection tools.  B.1.1 Configuration In order to connect to the board trough a LAN, all the devices have to be on the same network. The default IP address settings of the X-port are: IP address: 10.77.xx.xx , where xx is the host address unique for each board. Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0. Remember to change these settings if they are not compatible with the LAN where the computer and the board are connected. IP address and network parameters can be changed only using the local interface. Please refer to chapter 6 for the network setting commands.  B.2 Java(TM) Platform B.2.1 Download The Java Interface works with any Sun Java Virtual Machine after the 1.4.1 version. If the computer has no Java Virtual Machine installed, the recommended 1.5.0 version can be downloaded from the Sun Server trough this link: http://www.java.com/  B.2.2 Java Control Panel Java caching must be disabled.  B.3 Supported Web Browsers The  Java  GUI  is  designed  to  support  every  Web  Browser  that  uses  Sun  Java  Virtual  Machine  from  1.4.1  and newer. Here’s  a  list  of  Web  Browsers  where  Java  GUI  has  been  tested  and  troubleshot:  Microsoft  Internet  Explorer, version 5 and newer. Mozilla Firefox, version 1.5 and newer.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 198 of 206 Appendix C. Application Note  Screenshots of this application note are used as an example and the shown file names are not related to  ARK6-T2 device.  C.1 How to update 1. Launch the Java installer. Figure 60. Java installer    2. Insert the IRRM2 BTS Remux IP address into the numeric field. Figure 61. Java installer – IP address insertion
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 199 of 206 3. Click the Search button. Figure 62. Java Installer – Search button    4. Select the device version you want to load. Figure 63. Java Installer - Device selection
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 200 of 206 5. Click on the “Load” button. Figure 64. Java Installer – Load button    6. If  you  want  to  update  only  some  software  versions,  click  on  the  check  boxes  corresponding  to  the software  version  you  want  to  load,  otherwise  click  on  the  check  box  corresponding  to  the  Load  All option. Click on the “Enter” button to start the loading. Figure 65. Java Installer – Software versions selection
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 201 of 206 7. Once  started  the  loading,  the  “Stop”  button  lights  up.  Click  on  this  button  to  interrupt  the programming. Figure 66. Java Installer – Stop button    8. When the loading is complete, the pop-up window “Operation Successfully Completed” appears. Click on the “OK” button. Figure 67. Java Installer – Operation Successfully Completed
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 202 of 206 9. To save a copy of the file system click on “Backup” button. A pop-up window “Salva” appears. Specify the saving path, then click on “Salva” button. Figure 68. Java Installer – Backup Save button
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 203 of 206 Appendix D. Document versions Table 33.  Document Versions Version Author Revised by Date Note 1.0 Di Biase  November 8th, 2011 First version with all the operative modes. 1.1 Di Biase  November 23rd, 2011 Updated paragraphs 4.2 and 4.4.
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 204 of 206 List of Tables  Table 1.  Hardware options .................................................................................................................... 8 Table 2.  RS232 DE-9 pinout ................................................................................................................. 23 Table 3.  TLC pinout .............................................................................................................................. 23 Table 4.  TLS pinout .............................................................................................................................. 24 Table 5.  Input window ........................................................................................................................ 33 Table 6.  Tuner window: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 38 Table 7.  CVBS Inputs: Statistics ........................................................................................................... 40 Table 8.  ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters .......................................................... 42 Table 9.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings ............................................................................................. 46 Table 10.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation....................................................................................... 50 Table 11.  ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 53 Table 12.  ITU Processing: ITU Settings .................................................................................................. 56 Table 13.  ITU Modulation: Modulator manager ................................................................................... 61 Table 14.  ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes ............................................................................... 64 Table 15.  Adaptive Linear Precorrection: Management panel ............................................................. 72 Table 16.  Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection: Management panel ..................................................... 75 Table 17.  Output window...................................................................................................................... 77 Table 18.  Output window: Reflex Pwr Management ............................................................................ 86 Table 19.  Network window ................................................................................................................... 88 Table 20.  GPS window ........................................................................................................................... 93 Table 21.  GPS window: Holdover Management ................................................................................... 96 Table 22.  Alarms window .................................................................................................................... 100 Table 23.  Events descriptions list ........................................................................................................ 117 Table 24.  Alarms descriptions list ....................................................................................................... 121 Table 25.  Task error event specific data ............................................................................................. 126 Table 26.  Init system event specific data ............................................................................................ 128 Table 27.  Local User Interface: Idle Menu .......................................................................................... 140 Table 28.  Local User Interface: submenus descriptions ..................................................................... 141 Table 29.  Alarms descriptions list ....................................................................................................... 142 Table 30.  ARK6 SNMP Tree Structure ................................................................................................. 148 Table 31.  Alarms Code and Description .............................................................................................. 183 Table 32.  Alarm Thresholds Description ............................................................................................. 186 Table 33.  Document Versions ............................................................................................................. 203
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 205 of 206 List of Figures  Figure 1.  DE-9 Male connector ............................................................................................................. 23 Figure 2.  TLC connector ........................................................................................................................ 23 Figure 3.  TLS connector ........................................................................................................................ 24 Figure 4.  GUI - Login ............................................................................................................................. 28 Figure 5.  Java menu bar ....................................................................................................................... 29 Figure 6.  System commands bar .......................................................................................................... 29 Figure 7.  Operation pages bar .............................................................................................................. 30 Figure 8.  System menu ......................................................................................................................... 30 Figure 9.  Home Page window ............................................................................................................... 31 Figure 10.  ATSC / DVB-T/T2 Input window ............................................................................................ 32 Figure 11.  Front-End window ................................................................................................................. 37 Figure 12.  Tuner window: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 38 Figure 13.  CVBS Inputs: Statistics ........................................................................................................... 39 Figure 14.  ATSC RF Input: Status and demodulation parameters .......................................................... 41 Figure 15.  ATSC window ......................................................................................................................... 44 Figure 16.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Settings ............................................................................................. 45 Figure 17.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation....................................................................................... 49 Figure 18.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Modulation....................................................................................... 51 Figure 19.  ATSC TVCT: Add button ......................................................................................................... 51 Figure 20.  ATSC Processing: ATSC Measure ........................................................................................... 52 Figure 21.  ATSC Measure: RF power level monitor ................................................................................ 53 Figure 22.  ITU window ............................................................................................................................ 54 Figure 23.  ITU Processing: ITU Settings .................................................................................................. 55 Figure 24.  ITU Processing page: ITU Modulation ................................................................................... 59 Figure 25.  ITU Modulation: Modulator manager ................................................................................... 60 Figure 26.  ITU Modulation: Modulator test modes ............................................................................... 63 Figure 27.  Adaptive Linear Precorrection ............................................................................................... 66 Figure 28.  AM/PM Precorrection ........................................................................................................... 68 Figure 29.  Realizing connection .............................................................................................................. 69 Figure 30.  Adaptive Linear Precorrection ............................................................................................... 70 Figure 31.  Adaptive Filter ....................................................................................................................... 71 Figure 32.  Filter window: complex filter coefficients graph ................................................................... 73 Figure 33.  Filter window: module graph ................................................................................................ 73 Figure 34.  Filter window: phase graph ................................................................................................... 73
   ISO 9001:2000 Cert. N°4500/1   Version 1.1  SDT_ARK6_User_Manual_ENG_vATSC  Page 206 of 206 Figure 35.  Adaptive Non Linear Precorrection ....................................................................................... 74 Figure 36.  Output window...................................................................................................................... 76 Figure 37.  Reflex Pwr Management ....................................................................................................... 85 Figure 38.  Network window ................................................................................................................... 87 Figure 39.  GPS window ........................................................................................................................... 92 Figure 40.  Holdover Management ......................................................................................................... 94 Figure 41.  Alarms window ...................................................................................................................... 99 Figure 42.  Events window .................................................................................................................... 116 Figure 43.  Time and date setting .......................................................................................................... 126 Figure 44.  Menu bar ............................................................................................................................. 131 Figure 45.  File menu ............................................................................................................................. 131 Figure 46.  View menu ........................................................................................................................... 132 Figure 47.  Time window ....................................................................................................................... 133 Figure 48.  Alerts window ...................................................................................................................... 133 Figure 49.  Alert message ...................................................................................................................... 134 Figure 50.  Help menu ........................................................................................................................... 135 Figure 51.  About window ..................................................................................................................... 135 Figure 52.  Info window: Serial Numbers .............................................................................................. 136 Figure 53.  Info window: Server File System Content ........................................................................... 136 Figure 54.  Info window: Client System Parameters ............................................................................. 136 Figure 55.  Download Software Standalone .......................................................................................... 137 Figure 56.  SNMP Protocol Preferences ................................................................................................ 145 Figure 57.  ARK6 Tree Structure ............................................................................................................ 146 Figure 58.  SNMPv1 Trap Messages ...................................................................................................... 189 Figure 59.  SNMPv2 Trap Messages ...................................................................................................... 191 Figure 60.  Java installer ........................................................................................................................ 198 Figure 61.  Java installer – IP address insertion .................................................................................... 198 Figure 62.  Java Installer – Search button ............................................................................................. 199 Figure 63.  Java Installer - Device selection ........................................................................................... 199 Figure 64.  Java Installer – Load button ................................................................................................ 200 Figure 65.  Java Installer – Software versions selection ........................................................................ 200 Figure 66.  Java Installer – Stop button ................................................................................................. 201 Figure 67.  Java Installer – Operation Successfully Completed ............................................................. 201 Figure 68.  Java Installer – Backup Save button .................................................................................... 202

Navigation menu